Professional Documents
Culture Documents
User Manual
IPM
PVTP
Version 8.5
February 2011
PVTP
IPM - Fluid Characterisation OVERVIEW
by Petroleum Experts Limited
PVTP allows tuning of Equations of State (EOS) to match laboratory data. The tuned EOS
can then be used to simulate a range of reservoir and production processes, which impact
equipment sizing and reservoir recovery.
Multiple Samples Reservoir information is handled in a unique project structure to allow the
user to create a consistant picture of the reservoir system.
PVTP has been designed to lead the engineer logically through the fluid characterising
process, which includes tuning EOS models to match measured laboratory data at both
reservoir and process conditions.
PVTP can be used to generate tables of fluid properties, reduced compositions or matched
parameters (Tc, Pc, and Binary Interaction Coefficients) for applications such as reservoir
simulation and nodal analysis. PVTP maximises the value of your laboratory PVT studies
by minimising the amount of experiments required.
PVTP has been extended to include the modelling of solids VIZ. hydrates and waxes and
includes calculations for hydrate formation pressure, hydrate inhibition, wax appearance
temperature and wax dropout.
APPLICATIONS
• Characterisation of fluids
• Recombination of separator samples
• Determination of gas / oil contacts
• Separator train optimisation
• Phase behaviour prediction
• Swelling test simulation
• Solids (hydrate and Wax Modelling)
• Generation of PVT tables for use in simulation
• Slim Tube Simulation
• Structured approach to sample decontamination, addressing an increasing problem of
contaminated samples
• Recombination and PVT validation
• Simulation of lab PVT experiments
• Online Step-by-Step Help Guide takes the user through fluid characterisation
• Unique auto characterisation of heavy end fraction
• Simultaneously matches to reservoir and separator tests
• Tunes EOS for direct use in PROSPER well modelling systems analysis program
• Generates match data for black oil condensate model used in MBAL material balance
program
3
Copyright Notice
The copyright in this manual and the associated computer program are the property of Petroleum Experts
Ltd. All rights reserved. Both, this manual and the computer program have been provided pursuant to a
Licence Agreement containing restriction of use.
No part of this manual may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or
translated into any language, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical or
otherwise, or disclose to third parties without prior written consent from Petroleum Experts Ltd., Petex House,
10 Logie Mill, Edinburgh, EH7 4HG, Scotland, UK.
IPM Suite, GAP, PROSPER, MBAL, PVTP, REVEAL, RESOLVE, IFM and OpenServer are trademarks of
Petroleum Experts Ltd.
Microsoft (Windows), Windows (2000) and Windows (XP) are registered trademarks of the Microsoft
Corporation
The software described in this manual is furnished under a licence agreement. The software may be used
or copied only in accordance with the terms of the agreement. It is against the law to copy the software on
any medium except as specifically allowed in the license agreement. No part of this documentation may be
reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying,
recording, or information storage and retrieval systems for any purpose other than the purchaser's personal
use, unless express written consent has been given by Petroleum Experts Limited.
Address:
email: edinburgh@petex.com
Internet: www.petex.com
Table of Contents
0
MBAL Variable
.........................................................................................................................................
Bubble Point(Oil) Export (*.PVB) 65
MBAL Variable
...................................................................................................................................
Bpt. Calculation Dialog 69
Eclipse Black
.........................................................................................................................................
Oil Export (*.INC) 72
Eclipse Export
...................................................................................................................................
Setup Dialog 73
Eclipse Export
...................................................................................................................................
Tables 78
Eclipse Compositional
.........................................................................................................................................
Export (*.PVO) 79
CMG Black .........................................................................................................................................
Oil Export 80
CMG Compositional
.........................................................................................................................................
Export 81
Kappa Black.........................................................................................................................................
oil Export 82
File Operations
.......................................................................................................................................................... 85
Creating
.........................................................................................................................................................
a New File 85
Opening
.........................................................................................................................................................
an Existing File 85
Saving
.........................................................................................................................................................
a File 85
Copying
.........................................................................................................................................................
a File 86
Closing
.........................................................................................................................................................
Files 86
Restore
.........................................................................................................................................................
Temp File 86
Software..........................................................................................................................................................
Key Maintenance 86
Viewing
.........................................................................................................................................................
the Software Key 86
Printing .......................................................................................................................................................... 87
Printer
.........................................................................................................................................................
Set-up 87
Printing
.........................................................................................................................................................
a Report 87
Units System
.......................................................................................................................................................... 88
3 Models...................................................................................................................................
and Model Options 91
The Black
..........................................................................................................................................................
Oil Model 91
The Equation
..........................................................................................................................................................
of State Model 91
The Acentric
.........................................................................................................................................................
Factor 93
The Binary
.........................................................................................................................................................
Interaction Coefficient 97
Volume
.........................................................................................................................................................
Shift 99
Wax Modelling
.......................................................................................................................................................... 100
Wax
.........................................................................................................................................................
Model Details 103
Wax
.........................................................................................................................................................
Model References 107
Hydrates
.......................................................................................................................................................... 107
Background
.........................................................................................................................................................
to Hydrates 107
Hydrate
.........................................................................................................................................................
Modeling 109
Hydrates
.........................................................................................................................................................
with no water phase 111
Hydrate
.........................................................................................................................................................
Inhibition 112
Hydrate
.........................................................................................................................................................
Model References 113
Compositional
..........................................................................................................................................................
Gradient 113
Compositional
.........................................................................................................................................................
Gradient References 116
Density ..........................................................................................................................................................
Calculation 116
Standing
.........................................................................................................................................................
Katz Density 117
Costald
.........................................................................................................................................................
Density 118
Splitting..........................................................................................................................................................
Pseudo Components 119
Viscosity
..........................................................................................................................................................
and Thermal Conductivity Models 123
Lohrenz,Bray,ClarkViscosity
.........................................................................................................................................................
Model 124
Pedersen
.........................................................................................................................................................
et al Viscosity Model 125
Zhou
.........................................................................................................................................................
et al Viscosity Model 127
Little
.........................................................................................................................................................
and Kennedy Viscosity Model 129
Thermal
.........................................................................................................................................................
Conductivity Model 130
Viscosity
.........................................................................................................................................................
and Thermal Conductivity References 132
Water Modeling
.......................................................................................................................................................... 132
Water
.........................................................................................................................................................
Modeling References 134
Separator
..........................................................................................................................................................
Calculations and the Path to Surface 134
Separators
.........................................................................................................................................................
and Chillers LNG values 135
II
III PVTP
K Values
......................................................................................................................................................... 138
K Value
.........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog 139
K Value
.........................................................................................................................................................
Export/Import Dialog 141
K Value Export
.........................................................................................................................................
File Format 142
Surface
.........................................................................................................................................................
Split Factors 144
Split.........................................................................................................................................................
Factor Setup Dialog 145
Split.........................................................................................................................................................
Factor View|Export Dialog 149
Calculating
..........................................................................................................................................................
Interfacial tension 152
Using Material
..........................................................................................................................................................
Balance to Calculate Bo 152
4 Main ...................................................................................................................................
menu and Preferences 154
Toolbar.......................................................................................................................................................... 155
Preferences
.......................................................................................................................................................... 156
General
......................................................................................................................................................... 157
Volume Shift
.........................................................................................................................................
Setup 160
Directories
......................................................................................................................................................... 163
Regression
......................................................................................................................................................... 164
Units
......................................................................................................................................................... 166
View
......................................................................................................................................................... 167
5 Options
...................................................................................................................................
Menu 168
Options..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog 168
System
.........................................................................................................................................................
Options 170
User
.........................................................................................................................................................
Information 171
User
.........................................................................................................................................................
Comments 171
Units Dialog
.......................................................................................................................................................... 171
Units
.........................................................................................................................................................
Save Dialog 174
6 Black...................................................................................................................................
Oil Input 175
Black Oil
..........................................................................................................................................................
Toolbar 177
BLACK OIL
..........................................................................................................................................................
PVT - Oil 178
BLACK OIL
..........................................................................................................................................................
PVT - Dry and Wet Gas 184
BLACK OIL
..........................................................................................................................................................
PVT - Retrograde Condensate 185
7 Input...................................................................................................................................
Data EoS 188
PVTp Project
..........................................................................................................................................................
Data Structure 188
Selecting
..........................................................................................................................................................
Components From List 189
User
.........................................................................................................................................................
Database Entries 192
What
.........................................................................................................................................................
Number of Components to Select 192
Enter Components
..........................................................................................................................................................
as Table 193
Component
.........................................................................................................................................................
Identification Dialog 197
Recombination
.......................................................................................................................................................... 198
Enter Composition
.......................................................................................................................................................... 203
Composition
..........................................................................................................................................................
Editor Add,Delete,Edit.Import 208
Component
.........................................................................................................................................................
Import Dialog 214
Component.........................................................................................................................................
Import Select 214
Edit Mole
..........................................................................................................................................................
Percents 215
Binary Interaction
..........................................................................................................................................................
Coefficients 216
Pseudo ..........................................................................................................................................................
Properties 220
Automatic
.........................................................................................................................................................
and Manual Mode 227
Pseudo
.........................................................................................................................................................
Splitting 227
Hint.........................................................................................................................................................
on Method 230
Auto-Matching
.........................................................................................................................................................
of Densities and Viscosities 230
Original
.........................................................................................................................................................
Numbers Store 232
Advanced
..........................................................................................................................................................
Splitting Dialog 233
Whitson
.........................................................................................................................................................
Splitting Options 238
Splitting
.........................................................................................................................................................
Preferences Dialog 240
Contents IV
Whitson
.........................................................................................................................................................
Split Analysis Dialog 242
Pseudo ..........................................................................................................................................................
Split Profile Dialog 245
View Properties
.......................................................................................................................................................... 247
Command
.........................................................................................................................................................
Buttons 249
OmegaA
.........................................................................................................................................................
and OmegaB 253
Black
.........................................................................................................................................................
Oil Properties Dialog 254
More Black.........................................................................................................................................
Oil Properties Dialog 256
Grouping
.......................................................................................................................................................... 257
Reference
..........................................................................................................................................................
Data 259
Decontamination
.......................................................................................................................................................... 261
Decontamination
.........................................................................................................................................................
Control Dialog 261
Decontamination
.........................................................................................................................................
Mode Selection Dialog 265
Decontamination
.........................................................................................................................................
Quick Look Dialog 265
Decontamination
.........................................................................................................................................
Pseudos Dialog 266
Match Data
.......................................................................................................................................................... 267
Matching
.........................................................................................................................................................
on Mixture Critical Temperature 271
What
.........................................................................................................................................................
Data Should be Used in Regression 273
Regression
.......................................................................................................................................................... 274
Regression
.........................................................................................................................................................
Parameter Selection Dialog 278
Mouse Shortcuts
......................................................................................................................................... 286
Separator ......................................................................................................................................... 286
What
.........................................................................................................................................................
Properties to Use in Regression 287
Matching
.........................................................................................................................................................
Viscosity 288
Regression
.........................................................................................................................................................
With Solids 292
Notes
.........................................................................................................................................................
on Regression 295
Regression
.........................................................................................................................................................
with OmegaA and OmegaB 296
Plot Test
..........................................................................................................................................................
Points 298
8 Lumping/Delumping
................................................................................................................................... 302
Lumping/Delumping
..........................................................................................................................................................
options 302
Manual ..........................................................................................................................................................
Lumping 307
Lumping
..........................................................................................................................................................
Rules dialog 312
Select
......................................................................................................................................................... 314
Import Group
.......................................................................................................................................................... 317
9 Calculation
...................................................................................................................................
EoS 320
Critical ..........................................................................................................................................................
Point Calculation 321
Phase Envelope
.......................................................................................................................................................... 321
Phase
.........................................................................................................................................................
Envelope Test Points Dialog 324
Phase
.........................................................................................................................................................
Envelope Results Dialog 327
Ranged..........................................................................................................................................................
Saturation Pressure 328
Constant
..........................................................................................................................................................
Composition Expansion (CCE) 330
The.........................................................................................................................................................
Calculation Display 334
The.........................................................................................................................................................
Analysis Display 336
Layout
.........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog 338
The.........................................................................................................................................................
Copy to Clipboard Dialog 340
Constant
..........................................................................................................................................................
Volume Depletion (CVD) 341
Constant
..........................................................................................................................................................
Volume Oil Depletion 344
Depletion
..........................................................................................................................................................
Study (DEPL) 348
Differential
..........................................................................................................................................................
Expansion (DIFF) 352
Composite
..........................................................................................................................................................
Differential Expansion (COMPOS) 355
Separator
..........................................................................................................................................................
Process 358
Separator
.........................................................................................................................................................
Analysis 362
Compositional
..........................................................................................................................................................
Gradient 365
Calculation
.........................................................................................................................................................
Results Display 370
IV
V PVTP
Swelling
..........................................................................................................................................................
Test 371
Slim-tube
..........................................................................................................................................................
Simulation 374
Slim-tube
.........................................................................................................................................................
Input dialog 375
Slim-tube
.........................................................................................................................................................
cell data dialog 378
Slim-tube
.........................................................................................................................................................
rel perm dialog 379
Slim-tube
.........................................................................................................................................................
time steps dialog 380
Slim-tube
.........................................................................................................................................................
calculations dialog 381
Slim-tube
.........................................................................................................................................................
analysis dialog 382
Slim-tube
.........................................................................................................................................................
cell detail dialog 383
Quick Calculation
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog 384
Saturation
.........................................................................................................................................................
Pressure and Flash to STD 386
Quick
.........................................................................................................................................................
Calculation Separator Calculation Dialog 387
Maximum
.........................................................................................................................................................
Water in Hydrocarbon Phase 388
Steam Calculations
.......................................................................................................................................................... 392
Calculations
..........................................................................................................................................................
with Lumping/Delumping 394
10 Calculation
...................................................................................................................................
of Solids 397
Wax Amount
..........................................................................................................................................................
Calculation 397
The.........................................................................................................................................................
Analysis Display 400
Wax Appearance
..........................................................................................................................................................
Temperature 402
Hydrate..........................................................................................................................................................
Formation Pressure 405
Calculations
.........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog 409
Hydrate..........................................................................................................................................................
Minimum Inhibitor Concentration 409
11 Streams
...................................................................................................................................
Menu 412
Edit Stream
..........................................................................................................................................................
Details 412
Add/Import/Copy
..........................................................................................................................................................
Stream 413
Delete Stream
.......................................................................................................................................................... 415
Create a..........................................................................................................................................................
Stream to a Target GOR 416
Create a..........................................................................................................................................................
Stream to a Target PSAT 420
Add Water
..........................................................................................................................................................
to a Stream - Saturation Value 425
Add Water
..........................................................................................................................................................
to a Stream - Fixed Amount 429
Blend Streams
.......................................................................................................................................................... 431
Allocate:Blending
..........................................................................................................................................................
Streams to a Target GOR 433
12 Reporting
................................................................................................................................... 437
Setting ..........................................................................................................................................................
Up the Reporting System 437
Reports.......................................................................................................................................................... 437
13 Plotting
................................................................................................................................... 441
Manipulating
..........................................................................................................................................................
Streams 442
Manipulating
..........................................................................................................................................................
Curves 442
The Plot..........................................................................................................................................................
Menu and Toolbar 444
Plotting..........................................................................................................................................................
- Changing Colours 446
Plotting..........................................................................................................................................................
- Changing Labels and Options 447
Plotting..........................................................................................................................................................
- Changing Scales 448
Plotting..........................................................................................................................................................
- Changing Variables 449
Plotting..........................................................................................................................................................
- Printing a Plot 451
14 Utilities
................................................................................................................................... 454
API/Density
..........................................................................................................................................................
Calculator 454
Mass Balance
..........................................................................................................................................................
Calculator 454
Enthalpy
..........................................................................................................................................................
Balance Calculator 457
Single
.........................................................................................................................................................
Point Enthalpy Balance 457
Multiple
.........................................................................................................................................................
Point Enthalpy Balance 458
Hoffmann
..........................................................................................................................................................
Quality Plot 460
15 User ...................................................................................................................................
Databases 463
Contents VI
Creating..........................................................................................................................................................
a User Database 464
Selecting
..........................................................................................................................................................
a User Database Directory 465
Editing a
..........................................................................................................................................................
User Database 466
Importing
..........................................................................................................................................................
into User Database 467
VI
VII PVTP
Export Black
...................................................................................................................................
Oil Tables for IPM 581
Export EOS
.........................................................................................................................................
for IPM 585
Export Black
.........................................................................................................................................
Oil Tables for Eclipse 585
Example
..........................................................................................................................................................
2 - EOS Calibration of a Gas Retrograde Condensate Sample 589
Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 589
Data
.........................................................................................................................................................
Available 590
Initialise
.........................................................................................................................................................
PVTp and set Units 592
Build
.........................................................................................................................................................
and Validate the EOS 593
Enter Composition
.........................................................................................................................................
and define the Pseudo 594
Splitting the
.........................................................................................................................................
Pseudo Component 605
Enter and select
.........................................................................................................................................
data to match 614
Regression......................................................................................................................................... 620
Validation of
.........................................................................................................................................
the matched EOS 623
Hydrate
.........................................................................................................................................................
formation calculations 629
Determining
.........................................................................................................................................
Hydrate occurrence 629
Minimum Inhibitor
.........................................................................................................................................
concentration 632
Example
..........................................................................................................................................................
3 - Lumping/Delumping 634
Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 634
Data
.........................................................................................................................................................
Available 634
Create
.........................................................................................................................................................
and QC the Lumped composition 635
Create the .........................................................................................................................................
Lumped composition 636
Validate the
.........................................................................................................................................
Lumped composition 642
Adjust the .........................................................................................................................................
Lumping 645
Validate the
.........................................................................................................................................
Lumped against the Full composition 650
Export
.........................................................................................................................................................
the Full/Lumped composition to IPM 654
Example
..........................................................................................................................................................
4 - Estimating Decontaminated sample properties of a contaminated Oil Sample using PVTP 656
Objectives
......................................................................................................................................................... 656
Data
.........................................................................................................................................................
Available 656
Step-by-step
.........................................................................................................................................................
approach to decontamination in PVTP 659
Chapter
Technical Overview
2 PVTP
1 Technical Overview
An understanding of PVT properties is fundamental to all aspects of reservoir, petroleum and
production engineering.
PVTP is Petroleum Experts' advanced Pressure Volume and Temperature analysis software.
PVTP is a thermodynamic fluid characterisation tool that can assist the production, reservoir
and process engineers in modelling the fluid PVT behaviour and predicting the effect of
process conditions on the composition of hydrocarbon mixtures with accuracy and speed.
PVTP enables to analyse and predict with confidence the compositional behaviour of complex
mixtures including gas mixtures, gas retrograde condensates, volatile oils, heavy oils and
black oils .
PVTP has all the features that enable to build and calibrate EOS models to PVT lab report
data and to quality check the model by simulating all the common lab experiment. The tuned
EOS can then be used to simulate a range of reservoir and production processes, which
impact equipment sizing and reservoir recovery.
The PVT package can be used as a stand-alone analytical tool, or can be used to generate
Equation of State 320 (EOS) models, black oil 175 models, tables of fluid properties, reduced
compositions for applications such as reservoir simulators or nodal analysis packages.
In the context of fully integrated systems from reservoir to process, PVTP has the unique
feature (Lumping/Delumping) enabling to build for each fluid sets of two equivalent EOS
models, one with a reduced number of components ("lumped" composition), the other with a
large number of components ("full"composition), which can then be used within IPM to suit the
requirements of each module of the integrated model.
PVTP provides facilities to perform studies concerning Flow Assurance, like Wax and
Hydrates deposition, as well as calculation of thermal properties.
Compositional Gradient enables to determine the variation of composition with depth due to
gravity segregation and to generate PVT properties variable with depth.
PVTP is part of the Petroleum Experts' IPM (Integrated Production Modelling) Suite and as
such allows to export PVT data for GAP, PROSPER, MBAL, REVEAL, RESOLVE. As all the
tools of IPM, OPENSERVER is available in PVTP to automatise the most common tasks by
running them from a third party application, like a macro or a VB application.
APPLICATIONS
• Characterisation of fluids
• Recombination of separator samples
• Determination of gas / oil contacts
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Technical Overview 3
See also:
Fluid PVT Modeling 5
PVT for Integrated Systems 7
Consistency of fluid compositions 11
Flow Assurance - solids deposition 12
Automation 13
Examples Index 14
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Technical Overview 5
PVTP has versatile, easy to use composition input tools which allow the user fast access to
the PVT program’s modeling capabilities. Data input options include
PVTP has powerful capabilities to perform full Lab report Data Matching 267 including the
following options:
In PVTP all the most common calculations simulating lab experiments are available:
Calculation and graphical display of Phase Envelopes 321 for a user-selectable range
of vapour fractions
Calculation of Saturation Pressure 328 for complex mixtures at a single reference
pressure or over a range of entered pressures
Back to Overview 2
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Technical Overview 7
Reservoir numerical simulators are generally focused more on volumetric properties and
the phase behaviour. PVT modelling can be carried out by means of black oil or
compositional (EOS). In case of EOS modelling, the number of components has to be
limited to a very few to avoid the model to run too slow (with exception of thermal
simulators like REVEAL, where a larger number of components is required to guarantee
accurate thermal calculations)
Surface network simulators can work in black oil or compositional too and are focused
mainly on densities and viscosities, as these affect the pressure losses. As far as the EOS
is concerned, the number of components has to be decided on the basis of the model
objectives: if the objective is to determine the pressure drops, a small number of
components can be suitable and can reduce the run time. However, if the objective is to
perform detailed flow assurance studies (temperature estimations, hydrates, etc.), an
extended composition will be necessary.
Process simulators, on the other hand, focus more on thermal properties calculations,
therefore they require compositional modelling and the composition needs to have a large
number of components. This is because the thermal properties can be accurately estimated
by specifying a detailed composition. Density is by default determined on the basis of a
correlation (Costald) and pure components properties are not allowed to be modified.
In general, when connecting different models together, the common factor among them is the
fluid. This implies that it is necessary to be able to use a PVT characterisation that is
consistently valid throughout the system.
In IPM this is achieved by means of the so-called "Lumping Rule", which is a piece of logic
that defines the mechanisms to pass from the full to the lumped composition. The Lumping
Rule is created at the stage of building the EOS model using Petroleum Experts' PVT
package PVTP.
PVTP has all the facilities to create and quality check the couple full/lumped compositions and
to create the Lumping Rule.
An example of a possible Lumping Rule is reported below:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Technical Overview 9
In GAP or RESOLVE it is possible to import a Lumping Rule, which is then used to generate
the lumped (or the full) composition when desired, and (if required) the pair full / lumped
compositions. It is then possible to decide whether to run the calculations with the full or with
the lumped composition.
Back to Overview 2
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Technical Overview 11
Recombination of separator liquid and gas can be also verified by means of a Recombination
198 utility.
Decontamination 261 can also be performed using PVTP to achieve representative fluid
characterisations.
Back to Overview 2
Back to Overview 2
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Technical Overview 13
1.5 Automation
As part of IPM, PVTP is featured with a fully open-architecture that enables the user to
access the majority of variables and calculations through the OPENSERVER facility.
OPENSERVER allows running any calculation or combination of calculations using Excel
macros or other programs VBA capabilities.
Back to Overview 2
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Technical Overview 15
Back to Overview 2
Weighting for properties in Find Best Alpha within the Whitson Advanced Pseudo
Splitting method
In Find Best Alpha calculation area it is possible to set weighting to the various lab
experimental data to establish relative importance of each property
BI coefficient options in Find Best Alpha within the Whitson Advanced Pseudo
Splitting method
For the purpose of saturation pressure matching, BI coefficients are added at the end of the
Find Best Alpha calculation. This new option allows to select the method of application of the
BI coefficients: one BIC between C1 and the last pseudo, or one BIC between C1 and all the
pseudos, or recalculate the BIC using any of the BIC methods in PVTP
Compositional Lumping/Delumping
This unique feature allows creating pairs of Equations of State, one composed of a small
number of components (lumped), the other composed by a large number of components (full
or delumped). All the facilities are available to build sets of lumped/delumped, as well as to
QC them . Lump Rules can be defined and exported along with the compositions to IPM
software GAP, PROSPER, MBAL, RESOLVE and REVEAL.
Volume shift can be set separately in different streams of the same PVTP file
In previous versions a unique volume shift switch (Yes/No) was applied to all the streams in
one PVTP file. Now each stream can have its own set up, that is to say, can be volume
shifted or not, in the same PVTP file.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Technical Overview 17
Both black oil tables and EOS data can be exported to CMG simulators (IMEX, GEM)
For the matching of straightforward fluids, the procedure has been left effectively the same
Options have been added to allow the user more freedom to exploit the 200 components that
have become available.
Splitting in particular has been modified to give more flexibility in producing a match which
might serve the demands of reservoir and surface engineering. See Pseudo Properties 220
dialog.
Whitson's Method and best Alpha calculator.
Whitson's Gamma distribution model has been added to the pseudo splitting options.
This gives the user a range of distribution curves which may be modified to help match the
fluid. An analysis dialog 242 is provided which helps the user find the best combination of shape
factor alpha and number of splits. The other shape factors beta and eta can also be entered
by the user. See Advanced Splitting 233 dialog.
Splitting Preferences
This feature allows the user to control which of the five extended property databases are
used as part of the splitting procedure. In addition, the user can create and import|export a
set of properties. More control is also given on the SG and MWt normalization that occurs
after a splitting operation has been done. See Split Preferences 240 Help.
Follow Profile
This option is now available for all split methods, giving more freedom in dealing withy
contaminated fluids. See Pseudo Properties Dialog 220 .
Steam Calculations
A facility has been added within PVTP to calculate the properties of steam 392 . The calculator
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Technical Overview 19
makes visible the routines that are used for steam within IPM 6. A comprehensive table can
be generated which can be exported and interpolated.
Exports|Imports
Export added to Chevron Chears compositional simulator
Import to be added for PVTi compositional export files
Phase Envelope
Profile Points
A facility has been added to display a pressure | temperature profile on the phase envelope
plot. 100 temperature and pressure points can be entered or imported into the Test Points 324
Dialog.
Data to Clipboard
All results from phase envelope or solids calculations and profile points can be sent directly to
the clipboard via the Clipboard button on the Phase Envelope Dialog.
Separator K Values
Calculate with K values
Where applicable a separator area is provided on all dialogs to allow the path to
surface to be defined e.g. the Constant Composition 330 Dialog. In addition to a straight flash to
stock tank and flash through a separator train, the user can now replace the separators with
Separator K Values.
Produce and Export K Values
The K values produced as part of the Separator Calculation 134 can be exported from
the Separator Analysis display.
K Values within IPM Compositional
K values can be transferred to all other IPM programs using the K value export file *.
pks format or as part of the IPM EoS *.prp export. They can then be imported into the various
EoS options screens
Centralized Options
All options have been moved to a central set of dialogs with access from various points within
the program.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Technical Overview 21
Contact
us
You can contact
us by Email,
Mail ,Phone, Fax
or on the web at
http://www.petex.
com
User Guide
24 PVTP
2 User Guide
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 25
This chapter gives instructions on installing the program to a Windows 98, 2000 or Windows
NT operating system.
PVTP can be run as single user licence or on a Network. In either case, a special security key
is needed. The security key is called Bitlock for stand-alone licences and HARDLOCK for
network licences
The minimum requirement recommended for PVTP is Pentium 450 MHz machine 9or
equivalent) with 128 Mbytes of RAM memory.
In order to install the software from the CD, the machine should have access to a CD drive.
For a stand-alone licence, a security key (Bitlock) provided by Petroleum Experts must be
attached to the parallel printer port of the PC before PVTP can be run.
For network license installation, the security key (HARDLOCK) can be attached to any PC
communicating with the network.
The user should refer to the separate installation procedure for network HARDLOCK sent
with the purchase of a HARDLOCK licence.
If PVTP has been installed for the first time on a machine, the Bitlock driver must be installed
on this machine in order to establish the link between the software and the security key
(Bitlock driver).
In order to install the Bitlock driver, start from the main Windows screen. There click on |Start
| Programs | Petroleum Experts IPM |Utilities and then start the “Licensing Configuration
Wizard” and following the instructions.
In order to keep an original version of the program, back it up into another directory before
installing the upgrade.
When updating PVTP, the set-up can be used to modify, repair or remove components of the
IPM Suite. In this case, follow the online instructions
3. If the Autorun does not start, access the CD drive from the Windows Explore and
double click on Set up.exe
PVTP automatically creates the PROSPER.INI file in the Windows default directory using the
program's default settings. The location of this file is defined by this entry in the WIN.INI file:
[PETROLEUM EXPERTS]
IniPath=PROSPER.INI
It is not recommended changing the location of the PROSPER.INI file. If however, the user
wants to do so for specific reasons (to place it on a specific network drive), take the following
steps:
1. First copy the existing PROSPER.INI file to the required directory. For example:
COPY C:\WINDOWS\PROSPER.INI
U:\NETWORK\APPS\PVTP\PROSPER.INI
2. Next amend the 'IniPath' entry in WIN.INI to correspond to the new directory and path
where the PROSPER.INI is now located. e.g.:
IniPath=U:\NETWORK\APPS\PVTP\PROSPER.INI
During the installation PVTP unpacks a number of files onto the computer in the
specified installation directory. The unpacked files should not be modified, removed
or moved to another directory.
suggest using only the correct Bitlock with the appropriate software. Stacking Bitlocks may
lead to incompatibilities between Bitlocks, and may cause read/write or access errors with
some Bitlocks.
2.1.3.2 Creating the PVTP Icon
The PVTP icon should appear automatically in the correct folder under the Programs menu
after installation.
If this does not happen, invoke the Start menu and select Settings | Taskbar. Select the
Start Menu Programs tab and click on Add to add the PVTP program to the menu. Follow
the instructions on the screen.
To start the program subsequently, select the PVTP program from the programs menu of
the Start menu.
It is also possible to create a shortcut to PVTP on the main Windows desktop. To do this,
click the right hand mouse button anywhere within the desktop and select New | Shortcut
from the resulting popup menu. Follow the instructions on the screen to create the shortcut
to PVTP.EXE.
PVTP can then be executed by double-clicking on the shortcut icon.
An inactive software device may have been sent. For security, authorisation codes are
always sent separately to the Bitlock. On receiving the software package, please contact
Petroleum Experts to confirm reception. We will then verify the user access code
programmed on the Bitlock, and issue a set of codes to activate the Bitlock. In these
situations, the necessary codes will be sent to the user by facsimile, letter or email.
To enter the codes, run the REMOTE application installed with PVTP (see next section for
more details).
One can also create a shortcut to the Remote application from the Windows desktop.
For this, click on |New |Short cut anywhere on the Windows screen and follow the online
instruction. The program file is called REMOTE.EXE.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 29
Double click the REMOTE icon (or select the REMOTE program from the Programs menu of
Windows 98). A screen similar to the following will appear:
If the software protection Bitlock is already active, a list of enabled programs will appear in
the Remote screen as above. If PVTP has already been enabled, no further action is needed.
If this is the case, exit the Remote Utility program now. No user authorisation code is
required.
If the code has expired or has not been enabled, the Bitlock should be activated with the set
of codes provided by Petroleum Experts. To do so, click on the |Update button on the
bottom of the previous screen and the following screen will appear:
Enter the codes from Left to Right beginning with the top row (use <Tab> to move between
the items). Press |Continue to activate the codes to return to the 'Remote Software Bitlock
Utility' screen. If the user has received authorisation codes for more than one program, click
'Update Software Bitlock' again, and enter the codes for the next program.
Software protection Bitlocks also need updating when acquiring other Petroleum Experts
software packages. The procedure to update the Bitlock is the same as for entering the
authorisation codes. When the appropriate screen appears, enter the codes provided - from
left to right beginning with the top row. Press OK to activate the codes, or Cancel to quit the
update. To view the expiry date for any of the listed programs, simply click (highlight) the
software name.
To ensure trouble free processing and access to the PVTP program, please check:
The software protection Bitlock is connected to the Parallel printer port. Do Not
connect the Bitlock to the serial port, as this can damage the Bitlock or the PC.
The software protection Bitlock is firmly in place ensuring a good connection. If the
Bitlock is loose the program may not be able to access the dongle to activate the
program.
The printer cable is firmly attached to the software Bitlock. The printer should be
turned ON and be put on-line.
The PC system date is set correctly to the current date (i.e. today's date).
Back up the files on a regular basis with disk utility programs. This could help to
avoid the corruption of files, or help detect potential problems with the hard disk
before it is too late.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 31
The File menu provides the ability to open, close, save etc. The PVT package allows multiple
files to be opened at once. The Window Menu allows the user to swap between opened files.
This menu offers the user the standard options available from an MDI (Multi Document
Interface)
The PVT package can load multiple PVT Project Files each of which occupies its own
window.
The windows can be selected, cascaded, arranged and tiled via this menu.
Before working with a file, it must be opened. This can be done using the File menu Open
option or the icon.
To protect his/her own work, the user should save the data on a regular basis. Saving a file
is done using the File menu Save or Save As options. This simple procedure could potentially
prevent hours of work and analysis being lost.
To start a new PVT Project file use the File menu New option.
PVT Project This is the main type of PVT package file . The information file contains all
File (*.pvi) the composition input, matching and calculation data for multiple streams.
When opened the main data points are shown within the main PVT
window
Extract This file contains the results a particular set of calculations plus the
Data (*.pvi) composition which produced it. The file is produced using the Extract
option within the Analysis window or from the View properties display.
When opened the file behaves in the same way as the original PVI file
from which the data was extracted
Temporary This file is created at various points within the program, particularly after
Files (*.psv) regression operations, to hold intermediate results. The file is not
automatically deleted when a normal PVI file is closed. If a normal PVI file
becomes unreadable, it is possible to rename the PSV file as PVI and use
it instead. Temporary file creation is switched off by default. If the user
requires this facility it can be activated by way of the Preferences Dialog
157
See also:
PVT Import Files 32
PVT Export Files 34
Alternatively the files can be imported via the Add Stream Dialog.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 33
PVI This imports a stream from another PVTP *.PVI file. This option is
File Import explained in Streams - Adding a Stream
ASCII Three ACII file options are available by selecting from the combo box and
File Import clicking on the Import from ASCII file:
Importing a This is the file type that is produced from the
*.PRP file Proper compositional export and the various
compositional and compositional areas in the
other PETEX programs. This feature allows the
user to take this file back into PVTP and make a
working stream with it. (PROSPER EoS 35 for
more details)
Importing a This file is used in Eclipse 300 and is produced by
PVTi *.pvo file the Schlumberger PVTi program
Importing a A working example of an import file is contained
*.EQL Data File within the PVT\SAMPLES directory with the file
name example.eql
Line 1
No Data Read
Line 2
No Data Read
Line 3
Number of Components n (including Pseudos) <tab> Number of Pseudo Components
Line 4
No Data Read
Line 4,6,.......2n+3
Component name eg. C1, CO2, C11+ (note only one name per line). See note below for
names with *
Line 5,7......2n+4
Component properties in the following order separated by tabs i.e.
mole % component <tab> Specific Gravity <tab> Boiling Point (deg C) <tab> Molecular
Weight <tab> Critical Temperature (deg C) <tab> Critical Pressure (atm) <tab > Acentric
Factor<tab> Critical Volume
Note: These values ,other than mole % , are not required at present for pure components as
they are overwritten by Petroleum Experts Database values. However, if one wishes the
values to remain , add the character * to the end of the name . Example C1* within
EXAMPLE.EQL in the samples directory. All values are preferred for Pseudos. If no Boiling
Point or SG is present (shown by 0.00 value), the missing numbers will be calculated.
line 2n+5
No Data Read
line 2n+6
No Data Read
line 2n+7 .. end-1
Once the text file is imported via the file load dialog , the PVT file must be fully initialised by
Clicking on the Select Components option within the Data Menu then Clicking on OK
When the Composition Input Screen loads press Properties to bring up the Pseudo Screen
i.e. if pseudos are required.
When the Pseudo Properties display loads , press OK to calculate any missing pseudo
values.
Press OK on the Composition Input Screen when it reappears to return to the main display
Save the PVT file with the required name
WARNING : if pseudo properties are not set up as described errors will occur eg. with
density calculations
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 35
The file is produced using the Export option within View properties display or by using the
Export option from the File menu.
Select Type 1 – PROSPER EoS Composition from the Export Types Dialog Screen:
Only a limited subset of the data normally associated with a PVT file is required by PROSPER
VIZ.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 37
NEW!!!
In case Lumping/Delumping is present in a stream, the .PRP file will contain both the Full and
Lumped composition and the Lumping Rule to pass from on to the other.
An example is shown below:
*
* Petroleum Experts - PRP Export File
*
*
*Export File Signature
*#PetexPRP
*Export File Version
*#13
*
* !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! FILE DETAILS
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
* FILE NAME : C:\Peppe\IPM7_examples\PVTP\Lumping-Delumping\Lumping-
Delumping_final.prp
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 39
1
* Only first half of array is exported - values will be copied to second half
*
16 2 0.05
*
* Volume Shift Flag
*
1
*
*
* LUMPED COMPOSITION
*
* Mole Critical Critical Accentric Molecular
Specific Critical Volume Boiling Parachor
OmegaA OmegaB Costald Costald Single Exempt
Component
* Percent Temperature Pressure Factor Weight
Gravity Volume Shift Point
Volume Accentric Fact Name
*
* percent degrees F psig lb/lb.mole
Gravity l/kg.mole degrees F
l/kg.mole
* ------------- --------------- --------------- --------------- ---------------
--------------- --------------- --------------- --------------- ---------------
--------------- --------------- --------------- --------------- ---------------
--------------- ---------
*
1
* Lumped Values
*
5 0 0.0681924247
*
* Lumped Volume Shift Flag
*
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 41
1
*
* Composition Lump Tag
*
"LUM1"
*
* Number of Lump Rules Exported
*
1
********************************************
* Lump Rules Tag
"LUM1"
* Lump Rules Description
"CREATED FROM LUMPING OF LUMPING-DELUMPING_START.PV"
* Last Edit Date
28 11 2008
* Number of Lumps
6
* Lump Name
"N2C1"
* Lump Type
1
* Lump Description
"N2 + C1"
* Lump Data
* Number of Components in Lump
2
* Component Name Index Type
"N2" 0 2
"C1" 5 2
* BIC Multiplier Flag Value
1 1.37
*
*** End of Lump 1 ***
* Lump Name
"CO2C2C3"
* Lump Type
1
* Lump Description
"CO2 + C2 + C3"
* Lump Data
* Number of Components in Lump
3
* Component Name Index Type
"CO2" 1 2
"C2" 6 2
"C3" 7 2
* BIC Multiplier Flag Value
1 1.37
*
*** End of Lump 2 ***
* Lump Name
"iC4nC4iC5nC5C6"
* Lump Type
1
* Lump Description
"iC4 + nC4 + iC5 + nC5 + C6"
* Lump Data
* Number of Components in Lump
5
* Component Name Index Type
"iC4" 8 2
"nC4" 9 2
"iC5" 10 2
"nC5" 11 2
"C6" 12 2
* BIC Multiplier Flag Value
1 1.37
*
*** End of Lump 3 ***
* Lump Name
"C7::C9C10::C++"
* Lump Type
1
* Lump Description
"C7::C9 + C10::C11 + C12::C13"
* Lump Data
* Number of Components in Lump
3
* Component Name Index Type
"C7::C9" -1 3
"C10::C11" -1 3
"C12::C13" -1 3
* BIC Multiplier Flag Value
1 1.37
*
*** End of Lump 4 ***
* Lump Name
"C14::C14C15:++"
* Lump Type
1
* Lump Description
"C14::C14 + C15::C15 + C16::C17"
* Lump Data
* Number of Components in Lump
3
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 43
PVT Options
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 45
The calculation columns to be exported can be individually selected using the Layout dialog.
The data exported can be delimited by tabs or commas or alternatively saved in a fixed-
column-size format. De selecting the saving of column headings and Keywords will produce a
file containing only numeric data. If headings are required, a comment marker of choice can
be added to give the importing program a marker to search for.
The dialog gives the user great flexibility in what should be exported and in what format. The
export is to an ASCII file with a default extension of .PVE
For each section of Input Data or results a check-box allows the user to switch on or off its
export .
Input Data Included are all the entries made on the PVT Options screen i.e. Method,
Analyst, and Well etc
Input This is component concentrations and properties of the mixture prior to
Composition any grouping or regression exported in tabular form. The currently
selected Stream will be exported at this point
BI Coefficients The initial values for Binary Interaction Coefficients are exported in a
symmetrical table
When all the selections have been made click on the Export control
button to bring up the file save dialog. A file extension of .PVE is taken as
default, but any legitimate file name can be used
Layout The Layout screen (shown below) is the same as used in all the
calculations. Each selected calculation will be shown as a separate dialog
within which individual values can be selected.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 47
PTB files are files which contain the data in a form which can be imported into the PVT/
BlackOil/Tables section of Petroleum Experts PROSPER or MBAL or programs. The format
is fairly general.
An ASCII text file is produced by this procedure. The process is carried out using the Export
option within View properties display or using the Export Option from the File Menu
In PVTP the export is selected as Black Oil Table from the Export Types Dialog 34
The export file contains a version number, the latest being shown below. This allows the
format to develop with older formats being still supported. Two examples of the export format
are included in this document.
*Version 2
Apart from the version line all lines beginning with a * are treated as comments and ignored.
Blank lines are also ignored. No data within a table eg. A gas value where there is only single
phase oil, is marked by exporting a value > 3.4e35.
The variables available for transfer along with their keywords and units are listed in Table 1.
Any combination of variables may be exported but in general the choice is made to match the
black oil table input for the various programs and models (see Export from PVTP 49 ). It is
important to note that the values transferred between the programs are done in a specific set
of field units. Only these units are allowed. Conversion to the user unit is done on IMPORT.
Up to 10 tables are supported from the PVTP Export 49 Facility. Within PROSPER the number
of Black Oil Tables can be extended to 50. The number of tables to be exported is selected
by the user by way of the dialog shown below. The number appears at the top of the
exported file.
Above each table exported is a line which contains the table number the number of pressure
entries within the table, a table temperature in degrees F and an equivalent saturation
pressure in psig.
2 21 59.9474 4647.61
This entry is followed by column values which are calculated for each pressure entry. The first
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 49
number on each line is the If the Saturation Pressure is not included in the list within the table
it is automatically calculated by PVTP and inserted when Export is selected. Exports from
other programs should also contain this saturation pressure line.
2 21 59.9474 4647.61
1000 312.243 1.16236 1.45101 0.569708 0.0110762 0.01136
1263.16 375.444 1.18857 1.32124 0.681203 0.00834986 0.012384
1526.32 431.647 1.21031 1.21657 0.785276 0.00670003 0.0136971
1789.47 485.903 1.23131 1.1257 0.883083 0.00566162 0.015194
2052.63 539.529 1.2523 1.04332 0.975207 0.00498207 0.016746
2315.79 593.394 1.27363 0.967492 1.06206 0.00451619 0.0182704
2578.95 648.069 1.29548 0.897481 1.14401 0.00418155 0.0197351
2842.11 703.977 1.31799 0.83281 1.22135 0.00393125 0.0211376
3105.26 761.479 1.34125 0.773032 1.29438 0.0037378 0.0224872
3368.42 820.909 1.36539 0.717714 1.36333 0.00358442 0.0237978
3631.58 882.605 1.39052 0.66644 1.42842 0.00346043 0.0250838
3894.74 946.916 1.41678 0.618832 1.48981 0.00335871 0.0263592
4157.89 1014.23 1.44432 0.574543 1.54768 0.00327441 0.0276375
4421.05 1084.96 1.47333 0.533264 1.60213 0.00320408 0.0289321
4647.61 1148.97 1.49964 0.499923 1.64637 3.400000e+035
3.400000e+035
4684.21 1148.97 1.49964 0.499923 1.64637 3.400000e+035
3.400000e+035
4947.37 1148.97 1.49964 0.499923 1.64637 3.400000e+035
3.400000e+035
5210.53 1148.97 1.49908 0.501652 1.65867 3.400000e+035
3.400000e+035
5473.68 1148.97 1.49511 0.514031 1.74693 3.400000e+035
3.400000e+035
5736.84 1148.97 1.49132 0.526315 1.8349 3.400000e+035 3.400000e+035
6000 1148.97 1.48767 0.538507 1.9226 3.400000e+035 3.400000e+035
In PVTP the export is selected as Black Oil Table from the Export Types Dialog 34
The Calculations are set out in a series of 10 tables. Each table has a temperature and up to
100 pressures.
All the table variables except water viscosity and water Z factor can be calculated
automatically from the minimum inputs of Temperature and Pressure.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 51
The calculation ,which is carried out by pressing on Calc. Table or Calculate All , consists of
a Saturation Pressure 328 estimation followed by a Constant Composition Expansion 330 (CCE).
The values will be the same as those reported for the CCE option within the PVT package
Calculation menu. The saturation pressure is placed in the edit box at the top of the table. The
other values are placed within the table. All values can also be entered manually. Water
viscosity and water Z factor must be entered manually. Click in cell, enter the required number
and click away.
The tab section at the bottom of the display shows which tables have been filled with
temperature values. The table can be viewed by pressing on the numbered tabs.
Selecting The variables to be exported are selected using the list box on the right of the
Variables display. At least one variable should be chosen. At the time of export the
to Export program checks if a selected table has any valid data for the chosen columns.
If none exists the table is ignored.
This feature has been added to assist in the transfer of the correct columns to
MBAL's or PROSPER's table import facility.
Separator In common with the CCE calculation , the Table Export displays contains a
Data section for Separator Data 134 . This allows the user to define a 10-stage
separator train through which the CCE liquid will be flashed to correct the Oil
FVF and GOR. The processes which are used to return an oil to standard
conditions can significantly change the final oil characteristics and the amount
of gas liberated on the way. Alternatively K Values 138 or Split Factors 144 can be
used to represent the separator train.All stages do not need to be entered and
a last flash to standard conditions is always included.
The Combo box within the separator data area allows the user to select the
separation methodology. The Setup button allows the stage characteristics to
be changed by calling the dialog shown below.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 53
Export When the data required has been entered and/or calculated, the variables
selected can be exported by clicking the Export button. This brings up a small
dialog which allows the user to select the table or tables to export .
This dialog gives the user the ability to select one ,all, or a range of tables to
export. If Range of Tables is chosen the range required should be entered in
the edit boxes provided.
Note: the program will ignore empty tables or any which are found not to
contain data of the required type.
When the tables have been chosen press Export to bring up the file selection
dialog as shown below. The default file extension is *.ptb
*
* Petroleum Experts - PVT Black Oil Export File
*
*Version 2
*
* (BLANK LINES AND LINES WITH AN ASTERISK (*) IN COLUMN 1
* ARE IGNORED)
*
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 55
****************************************************
1 13 200 2333.57
2333.57 629.941 1.35745 0.882961 43.449 3.400000e+035 3.400000e+035
4500 629.941 1.30828 1.31799 45.0822 3.400000e+035 3.400000e+035
4200 629.941 1.31378 1.25692 44.8933 3.400000e+035 3.400000e+035
4000 629.941 1.31764 1.21631 44.7619 3.400000e+035 3.400000e+035
3700 629.941 1.32373 1.15561 44.5559 3.400000e+035 3.400000e+035
3400 629.941 1.33023 1.09516 44.3382 3.400000e+035 3.400000e+035
3100 629.941 1.33718 1.03501 44.1077 3.400000e+035 3.400000e+035
2800 629.941 1.34465 0.975199 43.8627 3.400000e+035 3.400000e+035
2500 629.941 1.3527 0.915759 43.6016 3.400000e+035 3.400000e+035
2200 591.027 1.34158 0.929484 43.7192 0.00686457 0.0188513
2000 534.538 1.31845 1.00374 44.1229 0.00760049 0.0177162
1800 479.926 1.29595 1.08433 44.5276 0.00851608 0.016734
1500 400.888 1.26296 1.2201 45.1434 0.010383 0.0155118
3 13 120 1991.97
1991.97 629.941 1.29441 1.48874 45.565 3.400000e+035 3.400000e+035
4500 629.941 1.25734 2.11163 46.9084 3.400000e+035 3.400000e+035
4200 629.941 1.26096 2.03798 46.774 3.400000e+035 3.400000e+035
4000 629.941 1.26347 1.98874 46.6811 3.400000e+035 3.400000e+035
3700 629.941 1.26739 1.91465 46.5366 3.400000e+035 3.400000e+035
3400 629.941 1.27152 1.84032 46.3853 3.400000e+035 3.400000e+035
3100 629.941 1.27589 1.76576 46.2266 3.400000e+035 3.400000e+035
2800 629.941 1.2805 1.691 46.06 3.400000e+035 3.400000e+035
2500 629.941 1.2854 1.61604 45.8846 3.400000e+035 3.400000e+035
2200 629.941 1.2906 1.54092 45.6995 3.400000e+035 3.400000e+035
2000 629.941 1.29426 1.49075 45.5703 3.400000e+035 3.400000e+035
1800 572.821 1.27437 1.58623 45.9066 0.00691228 0.0165872
1500 486.044 1.24381 1.75114 46.4429 0.00852023 0.0150153
*
* Petroleum Experts - PVT Black Oil Export File
*
*Version 2
*
* (BLANK LINES AND LINES WITH AN ASTERISK (*) IN COLUMN 1
* ARE IGNORED)
*
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 57
****************************************************
1 12 255 4797.86
4797.86 3.400000e+035 3.400000e+035 0.00411833 0.0422859 0.97991 20.7195 0 97.2247
5500 3.400000e+035 3.400000e+035 0.00387041 0.0462519 1.05528 22.0467 0 97.2247
5300 3.400000e+035 3.400000e+035 0.0039336 0.0451432 1.03361 21.6925 0 97.2247
4500 2.26167 0.158855 0.00426976 0.0381018 0.953063 19.0619 17.5708 82.3135
4000 2.05011 0.191435 0.00461425 0.0325163 0.91589 16.5493 38.5982 63.2706
3500 1.88678 0.22546 0.00510957 0.0279127 0.887895 14.1941 53.9514 48.5777
3000 1.74787 0.263274 0.00583408 0.0239703 0.869572 11.908 65.9708 36.6764
2500 1.62058 0.309895 0.00693245 0.0206507 0.86191 9.67012 75.5556 26.9673
2000 1.49777 0.37569 0.00869054 0.0180039 0.865657 7.50129 82.8601 19.3419
1500 1.37674 0.482473 0.0117632 0.0160404 0.880931 5.44005 87.502 13.9636
1000 1.25842 0.687898 0.0180868 0.0146771 0.907374 3.51807 88.309 11.3441
500 1.14769 1.25004 0.0371267 0.013755 0.944773 1.74571 81.085 14.1818
2 12 200 4842.97
4842.97 3.400000e+035 3.400000e+035 0.00371898 0.0484639 0.967651 22.9444 0 97.2247
5500 3.400000e+035 3.400000e+035 0.00354877 0.052626 1.04825 24.0449 0 97.2247
5300 3.400000e+035 3.400000e+035 0.00359591 0.0513722 1.02366 23.7296 0 97.2247
4500 2.42999 0.155694 0.00384106 0.0422023 0.928853 20.8622 24.6227 77.6758
4000 2.19843 0.18383 0.00410568 0.0354585 0.882886 18.1626 48.7076 56.7903
3500 2.02481 0.210082 0.00450624 0.0299959 0.848339 15.5943 66.3597 40.5701
3000 1.87626 0.237143 0.00511721 0.0252674 0.826311 13.05 80.4162 27.331
2500 1.73494 0.270678 0.00607671 0.0212263 0.818504 10.5268 91.6488 16.7109
2000 1.59192 0.320517 0.00765229 0.0180051 0.825787 8.08529 100.002 8.86707
1500 1.44535 0.403823 0.0104496 0.0156636 0.8478 5.79509 105.252 3.89406
1000 1.29708 0.562596 0.016257 0.0140963 0.883574 3.69799 106.845 1.57969
500 1.15324 0.973972 0.033818 0.0130932 0.932321 1.8031 101.6 1.6007
The first stage in the export process is to calculate the Compositional gradient via a variation
of the Compositional Gradient Calculation Input Dialog (see figure below).
The only difference is a change of label on the button from Calc to Export.
Input the depths or range of depths required and press on Export. This brings up the Export
dialog.
Click on Calc to fill in the table. The reference data used can be changed using the edit boxes
above the main table.
The program will calculate the compositional gradient for the selected depths.
When this has been completed, the program uses the compositions at each depth to make up
a black oil match table. For each depth.
The pressures used to define the Black Oil flashes are automatically selected with respect to
the saturation pressure.
5 pressures, including the saturation pressure are used. The data produced can be viewed via
the MBAL Match Data dialog. This display is called by clicking on one of the Match Data
buttons in column 1.
The automatically-set pressures can be modified manually in this dialog and the Black Oil
properties re-calculated. The check box in column 2 indicates whether the pressures have
been modified.
When the data has been set click on Export to create the ASCII file. The default file
extension is .PGD
Analysis allows the user to view the compositions calculated for each depth. See Analysis
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 59
The table is the result of 5 flashes on a composition at a particular depth. The aim is to
provide the data necessary for matching the Black Oil Model. The program automatically
selects the pressures as
The aim is to provide enough data to give the shape of the particular Black Oil correlation
above and below the Saturation Pressure.
If the selected points are found to be unsuitable the values above and below can be adjusted
by:
a) Putting the table into Manual mode using the radio buttons provided
b) Entering new values for pressure in the white boxes within the table
c) Click on the Calc. Button
Command buttons
NOTE
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 61
Any recalculation of the underlying MBAL PVT with depth table will invalidate and remove any
manually entered pressures.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 63
,1.234568e+038 ,0.00597958 ,
* Number of MatchData Lines
5
1056.11 ,455.891 ,1.41045 ,0.125053 ,0.0144333 ,0.345564 ,0.888033 ,0.0164925 ,360.764
,
2112.25 ,1249.86 ,1.9233 ,0.085132 ,0.0184277 ,0.574194 ,0.83661 ,0.00782229 ,453.442 ,
3168.36 ,3380.86 ,3.40831 ,0.0518623 ,1.234568e+038 ,0.743622 ,1.234568e+038
,1.234568e+038 ,1.234568e+038 ,
3696.42 ,3380.86 ,3.23817 ,0.0571572 ,1.234568e+038 ,0.823709 ,1.234568e+038
,1.234568e+038 ,1.234568e+038 ,
4224.47 ,3380.86 ,3.10936 ,0.0623314 ,1.234568e+038 ,0.903482 ,1.234568e+038
,1.234568e+038 ,1.234568e+038 ,
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 65
This display is initiated by selecting the Type 6 -MBAL Variable Bubble Pt. (Oil) option from
the Export Types Dialog Screen.
The objective is to provide a full black oil map for reinjecting gas into a dead oil to provide a
range of fluids with differing Bubble Points.
The dialog is split into 2 fluid types:
The data entry for the dialog is available in two forms i.e. Automatic and User Selected.
The table temperature is entered via the edit box provided. A set of radio buttons in the top
right of the display allows the user to move between the five saturated tables. Table
temperatures must be different.
The labelled TABS allow selection between displaying the Saturated and undersaturated
data.
In automatic mode the user can enter an individual pressure range for each temperature. If
the entries are to be repeated the Copy Pressures, Paste and Paste All buttons can be
used to make the data entry easier. The Copy Pressures stores the pressure range entered.
The Paste button will overwrite the current table entries with the stored values. The Paste All
feature will overwrite all pressure ranges whether saturated or undersaturated with the stored
values. If any of the pressure entries contradicts the other defined variables i.e. an
undersaturated PSAT the user will be informed and the values adjusted.
The user can now enter up to 50 individual pressures for each temperature.
Every SATURATED table must have at least one associated UNDERSATURATED entry.
Clicking on the Under saturated TAB brings up a display like that in the figure below in User
Selected mode:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 67
The associated Saturation Table Temperature is displayed. For this temperature up to five
Bubble Points can be defined. For each Bubble Point the program will create a fluid of dead
oil and injected gas. This composition will then be flashed to all the pressures defined. The
required Saturation Pressure is entered using the edit box provided. The user can move
between the five under saturated tables by way of the 5 radio buttons in the top right corner.
The pressure entries must be equal to or above the PSAT defined for the table. As with the
saturated tables all the pressure entries are independent of each other. A similar automatic
mode entry is provided.
Separator Data The input displays contain a section for Separator Data. This allows
the user to define a separator train through which the oil will be flashed
to correct the Oil FVF and GOR. The processes which are used to
return an oil to standard conditions can significantly change the final oil
characteristics and the amount of gas liberated on the way. When
multiple samples are being analysed, it may be necessary to have
individual separator settings for each stream. In this case, the
individual radio button should be clicked on. The stream separator
settings can be accessed via the tabs at the bottom of the table. All
stages do not need to be entered and a last flash to standard
conditions is always included. The combo within the separator data
area switches between the modes available.
Flash straight to stock tank
Use Separator train
Use K values
Use Split Factors
The values within this separator data area are loaded and stored
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 69
Command buttons
Calc To bring up the Calculation and Export Dialog click on the Calc control
button
Exit Exit stores the entries made and returns to Summary Screen
Cancel Cancel will clear all entries and return the user to the Summary
Screen
Clear Clear removes a table or all table entries
Clicking on the TABS allows the user to move between the Saturated and Undersaturated
results tables.
Calc Click on Calc to fill in the calculated properties for all tables.
The display becomes:
Export When the data has been set click on Export to create the ASCII file.
Analysis Analysis allows the user to view the compositions calculated for each
combination of P and T. See Analysis Dialog help for more details.
Where applicable the display will show the percentage of dead oil put
into the composition eg. For saturated points above the original oil
bubble point the display might look like this:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 71
Plot The calculation results can be viewed graphically using the Plot option.
See Plot Help.
When the variable is common to both saturated and undersaturated
tables the plot shows both curves eg. Oil FVF:
Main
Click on Main to exit the dialog and return to the summary display
The export is on the basis of a single stream (see Streams Help) at a single temperature. The
temperature is assumed initially to be the Reservoir Temperature, but it can be changed
within the Eclipse Setup dialog. Multiple temperature files can be produced by merging
several individual export files.
The stream is selected via the list box at the top of the dialog.
The calculations are carried out over a range of pressures for each of the three phases VIZ.
Oil, Gas and Water. Each has an independent range setting.
Eclipse allows for a variety of PVT data types, indicated by selection of Keywords. The
Eclipse documentation should be used as a reference on how these types are depicted and
used.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 73
This dialog has a combobox for each phase .The options include:
OIL No Oil
Oil with Dissolved Gas PVCO + PMAX or PVTO
Undersaturated Oil with Constant Dissolved Gas PVDO (+
RSCONST)
Constant Oil with Dry Gas RVCONST
GAS No Gas
Wet Gas with Vapourised Oil PVTG
Dry Gas PVDG
Dry Gas with Constant Vaporised Oil PVDG (+ RVCONST)
Constant Gas with Undersaturated Oil RSCONST
OIL No Water
Water included PVTW
The keywords selected are shown at the bottom of the dialog. With the Oil with Dissolved
Gas option the checkboxes can be used to select between the PVCO + PMAX and PVTO
options
NOTE on UNITS
Note that Eclipse has less unit options than PVTP. It is up to the user to output in units which
match the rest of the Eclipse input file. The units dialog can be used to make any changes
required
Command buttons
The calculation will be carried out at a single temperature. This is initially set at the Reservoir
Temperature but it can be changed using the Edit box shown above.
The calculation done on each phase is a Constant Composition Expansion 330 (CCE). This a
flash process where all the products are retained i.e. the total amount of each component at
the initial conditions is the same at all the measured values, only the phase splits (K values )
have been changed.
Fluid Range
Options
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 75
The black oil mapping of a fluid normally requires the creation of fluids
with a higher saturation pressure than that of the original. This is done
by mixing gas and oil derived from the original fluid to a new target
value. Within the program there are two options for the source of the
gas and oil:
Separator Data The input displays contain a section for Separator Data. This allows the
user to define a separator train through which the oil will be flashed to
correct the Oil FVF and GOR. The processes which are used to return
oil to standard conditions can significantly change the final oil
characteristics and the amount of gas liberated on the way. When
multiple samples are being analysed, it may be necessary to have
individual separator settings for each stream. In this case, the
individual radio button should be clicked on. The stream separator
settings can be accessed via the tabs at the bottom of the table. All
stages do not need to be entered and a last flash to standard conditions
is always included. The combo within the separator data area switches
between the modes available.
Flash straight to stock tank
This display contains radio buttons which allow the user to swap
between User Selected and Automatic modes.
In Automatic the pressure entries look like this. The phase entries are
independent of each other. If a phase has not been requested within the
Export Utility the edit boxes for that phase are hidden.
In the User Selected version the ranged input is replaced by a grid for
each phase where any mixture of pressures can be entered. Select
each phase by clicking on the tab at the bottom of the grid.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 77
All boxes should have an entry before proceeding to the Eclipse Export
Tables dialog
Command buttons
Export To bring up the Eclipse Export Tables dialog click on the Export control
button
Exit Exit will store all entries and return the user to the Summary Screen
Cancel Cancel will clear all entries and return the user to the Summary Screen
Clear Clear removes any entered values
The Calculation Screen is loaded when the Export button is pressed on the Eclipse Export
Setup Dialog.
The display is in the form of three tables, one for each phase, with input values on the left and
the required calculation variables calculations listed in columns on the right.
Each column has a variable name and unit as a heading.
Scroll bars are provided to show more variables and results.
If the values have been already calculated the display will show the last set of values
calculated.
To the right of each table is a calculated stock tank density for each phase. This is calculated
even if the phase is absent from the setup options. When all three densities are present, they
are added to the export file under the DENSITY keyword as shown below:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 79
DENSITY
52.6231 62.4562 0.0642391 /
-- units (lb/ft3)
The display has several control buttons along the top which have the following functions:
This option brings up the file selection dialog as shown below. Selecting a
Export file name with the extension .INC and pressing OK will automatically
produce the required ASCII file
Calc This option recalculates the table using the latest inputs provided
Plot This generates a full sized plot of the calculated results
This option allows the user to select which columns are displayed in the
Layout
results table. See Calculation Layout Display
This option closes down the display and passes the control back to the
Cancel
input screen
This option closes down both the calculation and the input displays and
Main
passes the control back to the main PVT screen
Two types of unit system are provided i.e. Field and Metric. When loaded the dialog will
select the system which best matches the reservoir temperature unit. Later, however, this
selection can be changed using the radio buttons provided.
If water PVT is required, enter the range and number of pressures required, change the
water salinity to the desired value and click on the Include Water Properties checkbox.
A combo box allows the desired stream to be selected.
Clicking on the Export button brings up the file selection dialog. Select a name for the PVO file
and click on save.
In this section it is possible to select the Stream from which to generate the data, then the
Export Type (Constant Composition Expansion or Differential Liberation) and the Water
Reference Pressure.
On clicking on Export the program will display a calculation screen, which varies depending on
the Export Type selected.
The figure below shows the CCE screen:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 81
Enter the Temperature and the Pressure range and the separator Calc Method, then Export
and Save the .GEM file.
2.2.1.2.10 CMG Compositional Export
NEW!!!
By selecting File/Export and then CMG (Compositional) Format, it is possible to export
directly a .GEM file containing the EOS composition and components' parameters that can be
imported in CMG numerical simulator GEM.
Upon selection of the above utility, save the file with extension .GEM.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 83
See the section on Black Oil Tables export for IPM 49 for further details.
Unlike the IPM export, the exported columns are fixed by a fluid type selection. This listbox
allows the fluid type to be selected.
View All cannot be exported but allows the user to see all the properties which were
generated as part of the CCE calculation.
The file exported has extension .kbo. An example of exported file is reported below:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 85
Existing data files can be opened quickly and easily at any time during the current working
session. To open a file, from the File menu choose the Open option. Alternatively, press the
left-hand mouse button while the pointer is over the file-open icon within the PVT Toolbar.
The list box within the file-open dialog gives the following options:
The program displays a dialog box in which the files matching the selection criteria are listed
in alphabetic order. The default data directory files are automatically displayed first. To open
a file, point and click the filename to recall and press or click on OK the alternative method
of opening a file is to double-click on the file name. If the desired file is not listed, it is
possible that:
When files are opened in PVT, the program copies the selected file into the computer's
memory. Any changes to the file are made to the copy in memory. In the event of a power
failure or computer crash, these changes would be completely lost. To prevent this, we
recommend to save the data on a regular basis and especially before quitting the program.
The Save command stores all the changes made in the current active file. By default, the S
ave command saves a file under its original name and to the drive and directory last selected.
If the file is new, the user will be prompted to enter a name and select a target directory:
When exiting the program the user will be prompted to close any files which have been
altered during the session and not saved.
The program displays a dialog box listing all the current files that match the selection criteria.
The default data directory is automatically displayed first. To copy a file, enter a new name
in the Filename field - up to eight characters are allowed. Select a different directory or drive
if desired, then press or click on OK.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 87
the software key. Software keys must be updated when new programs or modules are
required or the key expiry date changed. Please refer to the Remote 28 section for further
details.
2.2.4 Printing
As all printers have varying printing capabilities, the dialog box that appears will correspond
with the printer selected. Most printers allow to select paper size and source, page
orientation and number of copies.
To print a report, select the Reporting/Report menu option. Select the sections one wishes to
report on the dialog box. The program will lead through a series of input screens to set up
the required report sections. From the main dialog box, select a destination for the report.
Details of how to set up a report are given in Section
PVTP always works internally in Field units. To facilitate data entry and output display in any
units system, PVTP accepts data in the specified Input units and converts it to Field units for
calculation. The results (in Field units) are converted back to the specified Output unit set if
necessary. By making selections from the different categories, one can work in the preferred
units and save the results in the units required by company policy.
The changes made to the units system are file specific, each holding its own unit set. The
program allows to create one's own units system. To access the units system, point to the
Units menu and click the mouse, or click on the icon shown above.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 89
To access the units system, point to the Units menu and click the mouse. Alternatively, point
to the unit’s icon on the PVT Toolbar and click the mouse.
Customized unit systems can be created and saved under new names.
Find the required variable by scrolling through the list, and then enter required
changes in the low and high validation limit boxes. Enter the custom validation
limits in the units currently in use. To permanently attach the new validation
limits to a custom units system, click Save before leaving the validation screen
by clicking OK.
To save changes, click Save. The user will be prompted to enter a name for
the new Units System. This new system can now be recalled and applied to
any file. The ability to have separate input and output unit systems allows the
user to work with familiar units and to create reports in any required unit
system. PVT calculates internally in Oilfield Units.
If some particular units have been modified during the course of a PVT session,
the changes will be written into the .PVI file when the input data are saved.
Irrespective of the current units system settings, recalling a previously saved .
PVI file will cause PVT to revert to the units saved in the recalled .PVI file. To
permanently impose a new set of units on the recalled file, open a custom units
file (or use one of the internal unit sets) and then save the .PVI file. The new
unit’s settings will be used whenever the .PVI file is loaded
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 91
Acentric factors
Binary Interaction Parameters
Volume Shift
Hydrate modeling
Wax modeling
Viscosity and Thermal Conductivity modeling
Water Eos modeling
Separation and the Path to Surface
Oil
Dry and Wet Gas
Retrograde Condensate
Black Oil modeling is a technique which is based on values of density and GOR measured at
known surface conditions to predict the properties at other points and the results of process
changes. The technique is fast and accurate when applicable.
The equations used in PVT are derived from Van der Waals Equation and in common with it
represent the total pressure as a summation of an attractive and a repulsive element:
The classic Van der Waals equation describes this relationship as:
RT a
P
v b v2
where b represents the hard-sphere volume of the molecules and a the intermolecular
attraction.
The two cubic Equations of State which are available within the PVT package are:
In addition in IPM there is a feature within the program which allows the user to customise
the general equation to suit a specific need.
The attractive term is defined as:
and the a(Tc) function at the critical point is given by the empirical relationship:
The constant 0.45724 is called also Omega A and is specific of the EOS model (in this case,
Peng-Robinson).
α(TR, ω ) is a function of the reduced temperature T/Tc and the acentric factor as shown
below:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 93
The constant 0.0778 is called also Omega B and is specific of the EOS model (in this case,
Peng-Robinson).
All cubic Equations of State can be rewritten as a function of the compressibility factor Z e.g.
the Peng Robinson equation becomes
Z3 (1 B) Z 2 (A 3B 2 2 B) Z ( AB B2 B3 ) 0
Z3 Z2 (A B B 2 )Z AB 0
where
a (T ) P
A
( RT ) 2
bP
B
RT
and
Pv
Z
RT
See also
The Acentric Factor 93
The Binary Interaction Coefficient 97
Volume Shift 99
and R. D. Lichtenthaler.
"Acentric Factors are arbitrary and chosen for convenience"
There was originally an empirical basis for the value of the acentric value. Based on the
observed deviation of some fluids from that predicted for simple fluids, Pitzer proposed an
experimental method for determining the acentric factor.
It had been observed that for simple fluids the following relationship held i.e. as the
Temperature (T) approached 7/10 of the critical temperature (Tc) the measured saturation
pressure(Ps) approached 1/10 of the critical pressure(Pc).
Ps 1
Pc 10
when
T 7
( )
Tc 10
Pitzer's proposal was to use the logarithmic deviation from this relationship as a measure of
the acentric factor
Ps
log 10 ( ) T / Tc 0.7 1.0
Pc
The acentric factor enters the equation of state as a component which describes the change
in the intermolecular attraction component with temperature a(T) .
The Peng Robinson Equation is
RT a (T )
P
v b v (v b ) b (v b)
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 95
with
a (T ) a (Tc ) (TR , )
where the a(T) function at the critical point is given by the empirical relationship
R 2TC2
a (Tc ) 0.45724 ( )
PC
and
(TR , )
is a function of the reduced temperature T/Tc and the acentric factor as follows
(1 (1 TR0.5 ) 2
β is an empirical quadratic or cubic of the acentric factor
At values of
less than 0.49 the equation is quadratic:
0.37464 1.54226 0.2699 2
The table below shows some typical acentric factors. Note that the value increases with the
size of the molecule and its polarity.
Compound Acentric
Factor
Nitrogen N2 0.039
Carbon Dioxide CO2 0.239
Methane C1 0.011
Ethane C2 0.099
Butane nC4 0.199
Hexane C6 0.299
Octane C8 0.398
Decane C10 0.489
Acentric factors are available from the database supplied with the PVT package. The values
in table 1 are taken from the Petroleum Experts database.The acentric factors for all
components can be viewed and adjusted within the View Properties 247 or Composition Editor
208 dialog.
It is particularly important to select the right acentric factor for pseudo components. This value
can be calculated automatically or input manually within the Composition Input display. This
display is selected by clicking on the Properties button within the Composition Entry 203 dialog.
See also
Equation of State Model 91
Binary Interaction Coefficient 97
Volume Shift 99
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 97
For mixtures:
N N
a xi x j a ij
i 1 j 1
where
xi
and
xi
are mole fractions of components i and j, respectively and:
a ai a j (1 k ij )
Binary Interaction Coefficients represent a flexible way of moulding the ideal Equation of State
91 to match the non-ideal reality of many mixtures. The program offers the user a variety of
correlations for Binary Interaction Coefficients as well as the opportunity to enter values
manually. This flexibility, however, brings with it the problem of where to start when
characterizing a mixture. Hint on Binary Interaction Coefficients puts forward a possible
approach.
The manipulations of kij are carried out within the BI Coefficient dialog 216 :
This display is selected by clicking on the B I Coeffs... button within the Composition Input
Page.
The latter display can be called by selecting the Composition Entry 203 option from the Data
menu or clicking on the icon.
The Binary Interaction Coefficients Display contains combo boxes which allow the user to
select between the correlations available for kij .
Choice of BI Coefficient
Authors disagree on the values of binary interaction coefficients for hydrocarbon mixtures.
Some suggest that kij should be set at zero for hydrocarbon hydrocarbon interactions, and
given a value for hydrocarbon non-hydrocarbon and non-hydrocarbon non-hydrocarbon
pairs .
The approach of using BI coefficients is suitable for systems modeled using the Soave-
Redlich-Kwong(SRK) Equation Of State.
With the Peng-Robinson(PR) Equation Of State the following general approach was found
successful in many cases:
The program offers the user a variety of correlations for binary interaction coefficients as well
as the opportunity to enter values manually. The manipulations of kij are carried out within the
display illustrated below:
This display is selected by clicking on the B I Coeffs... button within the Composition Entry 203
Page.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 99
See also
The Equation of State Model 91
The Acentric Factor 93
Volume Shift 99
RT a (T )
P
v b v (v b ) b (v b)
Vs = V + cV
c is the third parameter and is the sum of the individual xi ci . This third parameter volume
shifts the equation.
Since this correction is done after the flash equilibrium calculations, the component K values,
saturation pressure and phase envelope are not affected. What is changed is the
compressibility Z and anything derived from it i.e. Density, GOR, FVF, Relative Volume etc.
The use of Volume Shift seems to be very attractive, since it corrects a known problem.
However there are potentially significant problems in using this method e.g.:
1) The Equation of State as a model is non predictive . Matching must be used to model real
fluid behaviour. Volume Shift can be used to make up for bad data or inadequacies in the
matching methods.
However, too high Volume Shift corrections can lead to incorrect results (for example,
unphysical profiles of densities or FVF).
That is why when matching on Volume Shift it is necessary to make sure the EOS gives
consistent results for a wide range of pressures and temperatures and this can be achieved
by running sensitivity calculations in PVTP, for example CCE, CVD, separator, etc.
This potentially negative effect of the Volume Shift can be mitigated by introducing the
Volume Shift at the end of the final EOS matching process.
2) The Volume Shift approach is a correction factor which solves the difficulty of matching
density. It does, however, introduce other problems with regards to the continuity of the
original equation. It is not a temperature dependent function. Matching a c at one elevated
temperature may cause difficulties with matching and the material balance at another lower
temperature. This can potentially introduce mass imbalance when going from high to low
temperatures, which may significantly affect calculations like pressure drop estimation in the
wellbore.
The IPM Suite contains corrections to reduce the errors in mass balance that volume shift
produces. This correction consists of using the Oil FVF coming from a mass balance:
(where the density of oil and gas at Standard Conditions are measured properties, see
related topic 152 )
rather than purely from the EOS. The correction above forces the mass balance in the EOS,
which has been found to counteract the negative effect of the Volume Shift and makes the
Volume Shift a viable solution to achieve reliable EOS matching.
However, when generating EOS to be exported to third party software, it is important to
make sure that those software use the same correction by mass balance as in IPM.
Volume Shift is available when any Equation of State model is selected within the Main
Options 168 dialog and within the Preferences 156 dialog. Once set, all calculations will use
volume shift. Volume Shift parameters can be set and tested within the Volume Shift Setup 160
dialog. This is called from the Preferences dialog. The parameters can also be viewed and
adjusted within the View Properties 247 or Composition Editor 208 dialog.
The volume shift within the program is based on a method from Jhaveri and Joungren (SPE
13118,1988).
In this method
Ci = bi . Si
Si = (1-(d / MWti**e))
or
(NEW!!!) A correlation that determines the Si on the basis of the components' specific
gravities
The volume shift parameter Si can be regressed upon if required (see Regression Parameter
Selection 278 )
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 101
The fugacity of the solid is equal to that of the solute in liquid and for the system at position 2
is given by:
f solid 2 x2 f 20
................eqn. 1
where
x2 is the mole % solute in the solvent or solubility,
2 is the liquid-phase activity coefficient and
f 20 is the standard state fugacity.
if it is assumed that the solvent and solute are very similar making
1
2 and equation 1 becomes
P1( pure _ solid )
x2
P2 ( subcooled _ liquid )
LIQUID Critical
Point
SOLID
Triple
Point
P 2
VAPOUR
P 1
T Temperature
The problem can be more generally solved using the thermodynamic cycle shown in figure
below.
Fig 2 Thermodynamic Cycle
Triple Point
b c
a d
T
SOLID LIQUID
f 2s
x2 L
2 f2
ASSUMPTION 2 It is assumed that the fugacities depend only on the solid
forming component and are independent of the nature of the
solvent.
The thermodynamic cycle allows the ratio of the two
fugacities to be calculated. The change in Gibbs free energy
going from a to d is given by:
f 2L
G RT ln( )
a d f 2S ...............eqn2
In addition the energy change can be written as:
G H T S
a d a d a d
H H H H
a d a b b c c d
S S S S
a d a b b c c d
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 103
Hf
Sf
Tt
Substituting the results of the cycle in eqn 2 and rearranging
gives the equation which acts as the fundamental for many
wax models:
f 2L H f Tt c p Tt cp T
ln( S
) ( 1) ( 1) ln( t )
f2 RT t T R T R T
ASSUMPTION 5 for most materials the melting point line is nearly parallel with
the Pressure axis allowing the triple point temperature to be
replaced with the melting point.
L P
si Hf T cp Tmelt Tmelt v
K iSL ( i
S
) exp[ (1 ) (1 ln( ) dP ]
xi i RT t Tmelt R T T 0
RT
.......4
where
xi
and
xi
are the mole fractions of i in the liquid and solid respectively.
Won simplified this equation by assuming the second and third terms
were equal to zero and the ratio of activity coefficients
L
i
( S
)
was equal to 1.
i
Within the model the required values for Melting Points and Heats of
Melting are taken from the following correlations
20172
Tmelt 374 .5 0.02617 .M i
Mi
and
f
H 0.1426 .M iTi m
where
x
is the molecular Weight of component i
2
Mi
vi L
d 25
x2
is the molecular Weight of component i and
L
d 25
is the liquid density of the component at 25 degrees C estimated by:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 105
L
d 25 0.8155 0.6272 e 04 M i 13 .06 / M i
The paper gives estimates of the solid and liquid solubility parameters
up to C40
is the average solubility parameter for the respective phase
Within this model the author uses the correlations outlined in his original
model for estimating melting points and heats of melting
CHUNG This model is outlined in reference 5 107 .
ORIGINAL This model is very similar to Won with Sol Params above. The
difference lies in the assumption that the all the species in the solid are
very similar and that the activity coefficient of the solid can therefore be
set to 1.
Equation 4 in Won Original above is modified by the introduction of
solubility parameters to be:
si Hf T vi vi v
K iSL exp[ (1 ) ( i ) 2L ln( ) 1 ( i )]
xi RT Tmelt RT Vm Vm
with
Vm xi vi
Within this model the author uses the correlations outlined in won
original for estimating melting points and heats of melting
In addition the following correlations are suggested for molar volume
and liquid solubility parameter.
13 .06
vi M i /( 0.8155 0.6272 e 04 M i )
Mi
and
L 2
i 6.993 0.781 0.049 10 .235 /
where
ln( M i )
and
xi
is the molecular Weight of component i
CHUNG This model is outlined in reference 5 134 .
MODIFIED This model is very similar to Won with Sol Params above. The
difference lies in the correlations listed below:
f
H 0.9Ti m ( M i0.55 )
vi 3.8( M i0.786 )
and
L 2
i 6.743 0.938 0.0395 13 .039 /
PEDERSEN This model is outlined in reference 3 107 .
WAX The model is derived from the simplified version of equation 3 (Wax
modeling 100 ) used by Won i.e.
f 2L Hf Tmelt
ln( ) (1 )
f 2S RTt T
Substituting fugacity coefficients for fugacities,this equation becomes:
Hf T
fi xi i p exp[ (1 )]
RT t Tmelt
where
xi
is the fugacity of component i in the solid phase
L
i
is the liquid fugacity coefficient of component i
xi
is the solid phase mole fraction of component i
and
p is the pressure
The basis for the model is the presumption that not all the high
molecular weight material can form waxes.
The fraction which is allowed to do so within the model comes from an
empirical relationship :
p pip
z iS z itotal [1 ( A B Mi ).( p
)C ]
p i
where
z iS
is the fraction of
z itotal
allowed to become wax,
xi
is the C7+ molecular weight
2 is the SG of component i
and
L
i
is the SG of an equivalent paraffin given by:
p
i 0.3915 0.0675 ln( M i )
The component melting points and heats of melting are calculated using
correlations proposed by Won(ref 1 134 )
20172
Ti m 374 .5 0.02617 .M i
Mi
and
H im 0.1426 .M iTi m
See also
Wax Modeling 100
Wax Model References 107
Wax Appearance Temperature 402
Wax Amount Calculation 397
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 107
See also
Wax Modeling 100 .
Wax Model Details 103
Wax Appearance Temperature 402
Wax Amount Calculation 397
2.3.4 Hydrates
This section is a brief introduction to hydrates and their modeling. It includes:
Background to hydrates 107
Hydrate Modeling 109
Hydrate Inhibition 112
Hydrate Model References 113
2.3.4.1 Background to Hydrates
This document is not intended to be a comprehensive guide to the subject of hydrates.
A detailed explanation of hydrates is available in references 1-4 of the Hydrate Reference List
113 .
Gas Hydrates are solid meta-stable compounds which form at higher temperatures than that
expected for pure water ice.
Gas hydrates can be referred to as compounds because they have a fixed composition.
However, a hydrate is a particular type of compound which derives its formation not from
covalent bonds but from weak van der Waals attraction forces.
Within a hydrate, water molecules form a cage with spaces(cavities). If a gas molecule is of
the right size it can occupy a cavity and weakly bond to the surrounding water molecules.
This bonding makes the overall energy of the hydrate lower than that for the molecules in non-
hydrate form and acts as the thermodynamic driving force for hydrate formation.
The compounds formed by this type of loose entrapment are termed Clathrates.
Water has been identified as forming three types of hydrates VIZ. I ,II and H (ref.1,2)
For the purposes of this program we will consider only the more common I and II forms.
The differences between the two structures derive from the number of molecules which make
up a single unit.
Both types of hydrate contain a variety of small and large cavities.
The number and size distribution of the cavities within a hydrate determines the types and
amount of gas molecules which can be held.
Not all cavities need to be filled to form a stable hydrate.
With a small number of potential guests and two possible structures, the calculation of
hydrate formation can be dealt with by the application of statistical mechanics (van der Waals
and Platteeuw ref. 5 113 )
Estimating hydrate formation is explained in more detail in Hydrate modeling.
Inhibitors
Since hydrate formation is can be an expensive process problem ,much work has been
carried out to engineer its reduction or prevention.
The most common methods involve any or all of the following:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 109
b) Adding bulk inhibitors such as methanol or sodium chloride which will shift the hydration
curve downwards to lower temperatures and
c) Adding "kinetic" inhibitors which act to slow down the formation of hydrate crystals
The modeling of inhibitors is dealt with in Hydrate Inhibition.
The user is encouraged to read references 113 1 or 2 to get a more in-depth view of this
subject.
It has been assumed in the model below that a discrete water phase is present. It is also
possible to form hydrates directly from gas water molecules. This mechanism is described in
Hydrates with no water phase 111 .
pure water (state 1) -> empty hydrate lattice(state 2) -> filled hydrate lattice(state H)
State 2 is really hypothetical , only being used to make the calculation practical.
Written in terms of chemical potentials the transition becomes.
H 1 ( H 2) ( 2 1)
The H 1 term represents the gain from adsorption of the gas molecules.
It is this difference that is a measure of the weak van der Waals forces which are giving the
energy advantage to forming the structure.
The estimation of this term is treated as a statistical gas adsorption problem and the varying
approaches to its solution make up the majority of the differences between the model options
(see Hydrate Formation Pressure and Minimum Inhibitor Concentration).
The difference between the chemical potential of pure water and the filled hydrate is given by
H 1 RT nci ln( 1 y ji )
i j
where
nci
is the number of cavities of type i
and
nci
is the probability that cavity of type i is occupied by gas molecule of type j (see table in
Background to Hydrates).
C ji f j
y ji
(1 C ki f k )
k
where
xi
and
xi
are the fugacities forgas molecule j and k calculated by the Equation of State Model.
C ji
is a temperature-dependent Langmuir adsorption constant.
The C ji term is commonly determined using the Lennard-Jones-Devonshire spherical cell
model.(ref 1 113 ).
This model requires an estimation of the potential function describing the interaction of guest
molecules and the water molecules at any distance r within the cage.
The lower the potential , the higher is the probability of finding a guest gas molecule at this
position. Of the alternative methods for calculating potential the most commonly used is the
Kihara (see ref 1 113 and 6 for more details).
In the Sloan option (ref 1) within the program the adsorption constant
C ji
is derived as follows:
4 R r
C ji exp( ) r 2 dr
kT 0 kT
where R is the cavity radius and r is the distance from the cavity centre.
The experimentally fitted Kihara cell potential
(r ) is calculated from :
12 4
10 a 11 4 a 5
(r ) 2z ( ) ( )
R11 r R R5r R
........eqn 1
and
N 1 r a N r a N
(1 ) (1 )
N R R R R
The Munck et al model from reference 3 113 is used in PVTP. This uses a function for
k ij
of the type shown for the model above , but with different values for A and B.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 111
H 1 w (T0, P0 ) T hw P vw
dT dP ln a
RT RT T0 RT 2 P0 RT
where
(T0, P0 )
w
is the chemical potential at the chosen reference state with temperature
xi
and pressure
xi
hw
is the specific enthalpy difference and
vw
is the specific volume difference going from
xi
to T
a is the activity of water within the system. The value of pure water is taken as 1. When an
inhibitor is used the value of a is adjusted to include the inhibition effect.
See Hydrate Inhibition 112 for more details.
The normal mechanism for hydrate formation assumes the presence of a water phase as
described in Hydrate Modeling 109 .
Formation of hydrates directly from a gas phase containing water is possible and occurs at a
higher pressure than the equivalent when a discrete water phase is present.
This calculation path is only followed if water is present in the composition and the Assume
free water phase exists option is set off (see Hydrate Formation Pressure Dialog 405 )
water in gaseous form(G)->condensed water (state 1) -> empty hydrate lattice(state 2) ->
filled hydrate lattice(state H)
The difference between the chemical potential of gaseous water and the condensed water is
given by
where is the fugacity of water in the gas phase which is given by:
where is the saturation pressure of water and is the molar volume of water.
Combining the above equations with those already outlined in Hydrate Modeling 109 gives:
...................................................................(h.1)
The difference between the chemical potential of pure water and the filled hydrate is given by
H 1 RT nci ln( 1 y ji )
i j
...................................................................(h.2)
where
nci
is the number of cavities of type i
and
nci
is the probability that cavity of type i is occupied by gas molecule of type j (see table in
Background to Hydrates).
The combination of equations h.1 and h.2 allows the possibility of evaluating whether the
hydrate formation from gas is thermodynamically favored or not.
Kinetic are designed to slow down the rate of hydrate formation by blocking
inhibitors or stopping crystal growth.
These agents, fatty acids, amines and fatty alcohols do not stop
hydrate formation, they only shift it to a different time and place.
Kinetic inhibition is outwith the scope of the PVT program at present
Thermodynamic disrupt the order within water produced by its hydrogen bonding.
inhibitors This disruption reduces the activity of the water, making it less likely
to form hydrates.
There are two main types of thermodynamic inhibitor VIZ. alcohols
(methanol, glycol) and electrolytes (NaCl,ZnCl etc.).
The chemical potential water molecules in the presence of alcohols
decreases because hydrogen bonds form between the water
molecules and water.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 113
H 1 w (T0, P0 ) T hw P vw
dT dP ln a
RT RT T0 RT 2 P0 RT
Activity correlations are found in references 1,2 and 7 113 for the inhibitors supported
1. Clathrate Hydrates of Natural Gases by D.S.Sloan :-Marcel Dekker Inc., New York
(ISBN: 0827 99372)
2. Hydrates of Hydrocarbons by Yuri F. Makogon :- PennWell Publishing Company,
Tulsa,Oklahoma
3. Properties of Oils and Natural Gases by K.S.Pedersen,A.Fredenslund and P.
Thomassen :- Gulf Publishing Company.Houston
4. Petroleum Engineers Handbook :- Society of Petroleum Engineers ,Richardson,Texas
5. Platteeuw. J.C. and van der Waals. J.H. : Thermodynamic Properties of Gas
Hydrates II. Phase Equilibrium in the System, Rec. Trav. Chem.(1959),78,126-133
6. J.M. Prausnitz , R.N. Lichtenthaler,E. Gomesde Azevedo :- Molecular
Thermodynamics of Fluid-Phase Equilibria 2nd Ed. ,Prentice-Hall ,New Jersey (ISBN:
0-13-599564-7)
The compositional gradient function calculates the effect of gravity on the distribution of
components within the reservoir. Under the influence of gravity light components will tend to
move towards the top of the structure with the heaviest having a greater abundance towards
the bottom.
Fig 1
fi(T,P,ni) f1i(T1,P1,ni)
With no gravity effect the fugacity of a component is a function of the temperature, pressure
and composition.
Fig 2
f1i(T1,P1,ni,dz)
} dz
fi(T,P,ni)
With the gravity effect introduced the fugacity also becomes a function of the change in height
dz.
The change in the component fugacities over the height change is given by the following
equation (full derivation in ref 1.):
f 1i
exp[ ( Mw i / RT ) gdz
fi ..................... Eqn 1
The fugacity of a component at reference
xi
changes to
f 1i
. The size of the change depends on the temperature T, dz, and importantly the component
molecular weight
C
. ji
When the component molecular weights are very different e.g. methane (18) and asphaltene
(2000-20000), the gradient is at its most extreme with the composition and consequently the
saturation pressure varying relatively quickly with depth.
Fig 3
P1,T1,n1
dz
Pref,Tref,nref
1. The vertical heights selected are resolved as a set of stages (see fig. 3).
2. The starting point is the matched PVT sample, which has a composition (nref), a
reference pressure (Pref) and a reference temperature (Tref) associated with it.
3. From P,T and n the equation of state can calculate zfactor and density of the fluid and
the component fugacities
x
at this point.
i
4. From the fluid density and the change in height the program can estimate P1. The
implication being that the composition is constant over dz.
5. T1 is calculated from the user-entered temperature gradient.
6. From P1 estimate, T1 and nref, the component fugacities
f 1i
can be calculated as in figure 1 i.e. no composition change due to gravity.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 115
The result of this calculation is a series of pressures temperatures and compositions and
depths for each of the selected depths. If one is starting from an oil and travel up the
structure, the fluid will get lighter and lighter, containing more and more methane. At the some
stage the composition calculated will be a gas. This is the GOC. With the Ps, Ts and
compositions the equation of state can be used to calculate the properties of the fluid at each
depth including saturation pressure density GOR etc.
The results are normally projected graphically with the change in reservoir pressure and
saturation pressure shown versus depth.
Fig. 4
The abrupt change in slope of the pressure line reflects the change in density from gas to oil.
With this type of system there is one point where the saturation pressures of the gas and oil
are equal and also equal the reservoir pressure at the GOC. Figure 5 shows the phase
envelopes of the gas and oil compositions just above and below the GOC.
Fig. 5
From this diagram it can be seen that the fluids are very different. They do however share a
common point that is equal to the temperature and pressure at the GOC.
The calculation screens within PVTP show two oil densities for comparison purposes. The
EOS value is determined directly from the equation of state calculation of liquid
compressibility Z. This value is used to derive all the related properties i.e. Oil Gravity, Oil
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 117
In general, the Standing-Katz method gives accurate densities for liquid phases with high
concentrations of heavy components. It is less accurate for light oils and unsuitable for vapour
phases.
Within the PVT package this density is displayed as a guide to the matched accuracy of the
Equation of State equivalent.
See also
Density Calculation 116
Costald Density 118
Automatch Densities 230
These additional parameters can be viewed and adjusted in the View Properties 247 and in the
Pseudo Properties 220 dialogs.
For equations (2) - (3) the parameters have the following values:
a = -1.52816 b = 1.43907 c = -0.81446 d = 0.190454
e = -0.296123 f = 0.386914 g = -0.0427258 h = -0.0480645
The pure-component parameters within the equations are the characteristic volume V*, a
slightly adjusted critical
temperature Tc,HBT and the SRK-acentric factor ω SRK. These are tabulated for many
compounds in Reid et al.
[3]. Reid et al. recommended the use of these special parameters to get best accuracy.
Hankinson and
Thomson [9] also give their original parameter collection.
In this program the Tc used is the standard one. The V* has a similar value to the standard
Vc and is called the COSTALD Critical Volume within the program. The density calculated is
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 119
very sensitive to the values given to the individual COSTALD Critical Volumes. ω SRK
becomes the COSTALD Accentric Factor property.
Mixture properties are calculated by a series of mixing rules which are detailed in reference 2.
References
See also
Density Calculation 116
Standing Katz Density 117
Automatch Densities 230
Preferences Dialog 157
Several Splitting method are available in PVTP. Each method corresponds to a different way
of describing the components' distribution within the defined pseudo component.
The splitting methods available are:
Figure 1
Petroleum This method is an upgrade of the Original Method to give more consistent
Experts 1 results. Method 1 was retained for backwards compatibility
Petroleum The distribution of components is made up of a single falling exponential
Experts 2 function.
Figure 2 gives an example of this type of distribution. This method was
found to be better for modeling higher saturation condensates. As the last
pseudo is split into 2 several times a much larger pseudo is produced than
with methods 1 or 2. The interaction of this large component with methane
tends to drive up the fluid saturation pressure. Matching a higher dewpoint
is normally the key to modeling this type of fluid (see Step by Step Guide
472 )
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 121
Figure 2
Follow This feature allows the user to determine all or part of the component
Profile distribution. this can be extremely helpful in dealing with contamination or
fluids with distinctive distributions e.g. biodegraded fluids. To set up a
profile click on the Setup Profile button within the Pseudo Properties 220 or
the Advance Splitting 233 dialogs. This brings up the Split Profile 245 dialog
where the relevant data can be entered. When the distribution is
recalculated the split algorithm will give the components the values
defined and follow a declining distribution for the rest.
This methodology is key to the decontamination 261 procedure. Figure 3
gives an example of this type of distribution.
Figure 3
Whitson The most recent and most flexible method. This uses a gamma function to
Method produce a distribution which an vary considerably in shape.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 123
Figure 4
The three parameters used within the Whitson gamma distribution are
alpha, beta and eta. The main shape function is alpha and this is always a
user input in the program. See Advanced Splitting 233 dialog and Whitson
Splitting Options 238 for more details on parameter entry.
(M n )/
....................(2)
is the average molecular weight, alpha and eta are the other two
distribution parameters.
Eta is the start molecular weight and is normally estimated from
14n 6 ............................(3)
A facility is provided within the program which helps the user to find the
best combination of alpha and number of pseudos for the fluid being
matched. See Whitson Split Analysis 242 dialog for more details
2.3.8 Viscosity and Thermal Conductivity Models
Various viscosity models have been introduced into the PVTP program.Only one model is
active in a file at any one time. The active model is selected via the combo box which appears
on all the calculation input and regression selection displays.
The models available are listed below. To obtain details of any model click on the name.
Lohrenz, Bray Clark 124 based on Jossi et al with reduced density written in terms of Vcs
Pedersen et al 125 corresponding states model with methane as the reference
substance
Zhou et al 127 corresponding states model with nC14 as the reference substance
Little and Kennedy 129 correlation based on oil density molecular weight, specific gravity
and weight fraction of C7+
With unmatched fluids the Pedersen model tends to give the best results. Lohrenz Bray Clark
is the most commonly used model but it gives high errors for liquids if the viscosity is not
matched. When matched the LBC model gives the best match. In most cases LBC is the only
practical options as export formats to other packages are written in terms of LBC inputs. The
Little and Kennedy correlation is very good at predicting the viscosity of oils above bubble
point. Below saturation pressure results are mixed with some fluid values being totally
unsatisfactory.
The thermal conductivity 130 model that is included within PVTP is very similar in derivation to
the viscosity model from Pedersen et al
See also
Viscosity and Thermal Conductivity References 132
2.3.8.1 Lohrenz,Bray,ClarkViscosity Model
Various viscosity models have been introduced into the PVTP program. The Lohrenz-Bray-
Clark model(ref 5 132 ) is probably the most commonly used for hydrocarbon mixtures.
It is an adaptation of a model proposed by Jossi et al (ref 11 132 ).
where a1 = 0.10230
a2 = 0.023364
a3 = 0.05833
a4 = -0.040758
a5 = 0.0093324
x2
is the low-pressure gas mixture viscosity and is determined by the method proposed by
Herning and Zippener (ref 12 132 )
N N
*
* zi i MW i1 / 2 / z i MW i1 / 2
i 1 i 1
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 125
* 5 1
i 34 x10 Tri0.94
i for
Tri 1.5
* 5 1
i 17 .78 x10 ( 4.58Tri 1.67 ) 5 / 8
i for
Tri 1.5
2is the component viscosity-reducing parameter.
For a mixture this variable is determined as follows:
N 1/ 6 N 1/ 2 N 2/3
z i Tci z i MW i z i Pci
i 1 i 1 i 1
2 in equation 1 is the mixture density divided by the critical density of the mixture.
r
c
The variation introduced by Lohrenz et al was in the calculation of the critical density.
This variable was rewritten in terms of the critical volumes of the mixture components.
1
N
1
c ( z iVci ) z c 7 VcC 7
Vc i 1
i C7
The origins of the LBC model lies in gases rather than liquids. Its dependence on the density
term causes inaccuracies with viscous fluids.
NOTES on REGRESSION
Without matching the LBC model cannot reliably reproduce the viscosity of oils. The
introduction of Viscosity Automatching into the PVTP program was designed to help address
this weakness.
In regression the program uses the component critical volumes to match lab data. Since the
Vc values are not used anywhere else within the EoS models, this matching can be done in
isolation.
See Viscosity Matching 288 for more details on the procedure used.
r f ( Pr , Tr )
r 1/ 6
(Tc ) ( Pc ) 2 / 3 ( MW )1 / 2
The basic premise of the corresponding states theory is that the function
f is the same for all the similar substances within the group.
Pedersen et al (refs 1, 3, 4) have proposed the following relationship for the viscosity of
mixtures.
1/ 6
mix ( P, T ) (Tc , mix / Tco ) ( Pc , mix / Pco ) 2 / 3 ( MW mix / MW o ) 1 / 2 ( mix 0 )( o ( Po , To ))
...........1)
where
Tc , mix mix
To T /( )
Tco o and
Pc , mix mix
Po P /( )
Pco o
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 127
The model for the viscosity of the reference substance is based on the work of Hanley et al (
reference 9 132 ).
This has been extended by Pedersen and Fredenslund (ref 1, 3 132 ) to become:
( ,T ) o (T ) 1 (T ) F1 ' ( ,T ) F2 "( ,T )
Each element is a polynomial in temperature and methane density. See reference 1 and 4 132
for details.
The methane density comes in the form of a modified BWR EoS. Details of this polynomial
are given in reference 10 132 .
Pedersen et al have suggested that the correction factors should take the following form:
3 1.847 0.5173
1 7.378 x10 MW mix
mix ri
and
1.847
o 1 0.031 ri
NOTES on REGRESSION
In general, without matching the Pedersen model gets closer to the range of petroleum
mixture viscosities. There are still inaccuracies, however, particularly with viscous oils. In an
effort to reduce this error a matching facility has been added to this model. Unfortunately, the
main variables within the model are the component Tcs and Pcs. Since these values are set
by PSAT matching etc. it is not practical to use them again for viscosity matching. As an
alternative, a shift and multiplier option has been added to match viscosity with this model i.e.
Visc = Visc*Multiplier + Shift
See Viscosity Matching 288 for more details on the procedure used.
r 1/ 6
(Tc ) ( Pc ) 2 / 3 ( MW )1 / 2
The basic premise of the corresponding states theory is that the function
f is the same for all the similar substances within the group.
Zhou et al (ref 6) have proposed the following relationship for the viscosity of mixtures.
where
Tc , mix
To T /( )
Tco and
Tc , mix
To T /( )
Tco
a = -4.868729x10-6
b = 6.162691x10-3
c = -3.461585
d = 1.545022x10-9
e = -3.443880x10-6
f = 4.187426x10-3
g = -2.527380
h = 874.0397
i = -2.985316x10-4
j = 0.3435125
k = -182.6151
NOTES on REGRESSION
In general, the Zhou model does not get as good an initial value as that of Pedersen et al.
There are significant inaccuracies, particularly with viscous oils. In an effort to reduce this
error a matching facility has been added to this model. Unfortunately as with Pedersen, the
main variables within the model are the component Tcs and Pcs. Since these values are set
by PSAT matching etc. it is not practical to use them again for viscosity matching.
As an alternative, a shift and multiplier option has been added to match viscosity with this
model i.e..
Visc = Visc*Multiplier + Shift
See Viscosity Matching 288 for more details on the procedure used.
See also
Viscosity and Thermal Conductivity References 132
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 129
B6 m
B7 ( M ) B8 ( M m ) B9 ( M m )4 B10 ( m )3 B11 ( m )4
T
where
B is the viscosity, T is the temperature in degrees Rankin and P is the pressure in psia.
The values of
xi
and
xi
are given by the following functions:
am exp log e A
bm exp log e B
A and B in turn are given by polynomial expansions:
1 M m
A A0 A1 A2 ( M ) c 7 A3 A4
T c7
T
2
A5 m
A6 ( M ) A7 ( M ) 3 A8 ( M m ) A9 ( M m )3 A10 ( m )2
T
and
4 4
1 1 3 4 M
B B0 B1 B2 B3 c7 B4 c7 B5 c7
T T
4
B6 m
B7 ( M ) B8 ( M m ) B9 ( M m )4 B10 ( m )3 B11 ( m )4
T
with
M c7
the molecular weight of the C7+ fraction
c7
the specific gravity of the C7+ fraction
M the average molecular weight of the mixture
x
the density of the mixture at reservoir conditions
The value of the A and B constants are given in the table below:
A Value B Value
0 21.918581 -2.6941621
1 -16815.621 3757.4919
2 0.023315983 -0.31409829x10(12)
3 -0.019218951 -33.744827
4 29938.501 31.333913
5 -2802762.9 0.24400196x10(-10)
6 -0.096858449 0.700237064x10(12)
7 0.54324554x10(-5) -0.037022195
8 0.13129082 0.070811794
9 -0.10526154x10(-5) -0.83033554x10(-9)
10 -31.680427 21.710610
11 -31.083554
See also
Viscosity and Thermal Conductivity References 132
Pedersen et al (refs 1,3,4) have proposed the following relationship for the thermal
conductivity of mixtures.
1/ 6
mix ( P, T ) (Tc , mix / Tco ) ( Pc , mix / Pco ) 2 / 3 ( MW mix / MW o ) 1/ 2
where
Tc , mix mix
To T /( )
Tco o and
Pc , mix mix
Po P /( )
Pco o
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 131
Tci 1 / 3 Tcj
8 z i z j [( ) ( )1 / 3 ]3 [Tci Tcj ]1 / 2
i j Pci Pcj
Pc , mix ( )
T Tcj
( z i z j [( ci )1 / 3 ( ) 1/ 3 3
] ) 2
i j Pci Pcj
The molecular weight is calculated using an expression put forward by Mo and Gubbins (ref. 8
132 )
where
x
is the gas viscosity is the gas viscosity at temperature T and 1 atm.
id
Cp is the Ideal Gas Heat Capacity at temperature T. R is the gas constant.
x
is the reduced density.
The model for the thermal conductivity of the reference substance is based on the work of
Hanley et al (reference 9 132 ).
This has been extended by Pedersen and Fredenslund (ref 1,4) to become:
( ,T ) o (T ) 1 (T ) F1 , ( , T ) F2 ,,
( ,T ) c ( ,T )
Each element is a polynomial in temperature and methane density. See reference 1 and 4 for
details.
The methane density comes in the form of a modified BWR EoS. Details of this polynomial
are given in reference 10 132 .
Tham and Gubbins reported
values for the smaller molecules found in hydrocarbon mixtures(ref 11 132 ).
x
Pedersen and Fredenslund (ref 4) extended this past C7 using the function:
2.043
i 1 0.0006004 ri MW i1.086
with the value for mixtures given by:
mix zi z j ( i j ) 0.5
i j
..................2)
This expression was modified by Pedersen and Fredenslund (ref 4 132 ) to be:
mix 1 ( r / 2.6605 ) 2.4049 ( 1)
where
is equal to the
C
value in equation 2)
ji
Workers in this area (refs 1 and 2), have concentrated their efforts in modifying the attractive
function a(T) of water and providing binary interaction coefficients between water and the
other species within the mixture.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 133
Aqueous In general the value of the BIC in this phase is given by:
Phase
k ij A0 (1 0 c sw ) A1Tri (1 1 c sw ) A2Tri2 (1 2 c sw )
where j represents water, csw is the salinity of the water and Tri is the reduced
temperature of component i.
The constants in the equation have the following values:
0.1
Ao 1.1120 1.7369 i
A1 1.1001 0.8360 i
A2 1.15742 1.0988 i
13
0 4.7863 x10 i
2
1 1.438 x10
3
2 2.1547 x10
In addition the authors proposed specific correlations for N2,CO2 and H2S
N2
0.7505 0.75
k ij 1.70235 (1 0.25587 c sw ) 0.44338 (1 0.08126 c sw )Tri
CO2
0.7505 0.979
k ij 0.31092 (1 0.15587 c sw ) 0.23580 (1 0.17837 c sw )Tri 21 .2566 exp( 6.7222 Tri c sw )
H2S
k ij 0.20441 0.23426 Tri
Non-aqueous In the non-aqueous phase only H2S is given a temperature dependent BIC:
Phase
k ij 0.19031 0.05965 Tri
Some of the lighter components are given the values shown below , the rest
are given a value of 0.5
C1 = 0.485
C2 = 0.492
C3 = 0.5525
nC4 = 0.5091
N2 = 0.4778
CO2 = 0.1896
In addition , the normal a(T) function is replaced for water with the equation :
1/ 2
1 0.453 (1 Tr (1 0.0103 c 1sw.1 )) 0.034 (Tr 3
1)
The fact that the BICs are temperature and phase dependent means that they
cannot be manually set by the user.
See Streams 412 Menu on how streams containing water may be prepared.
1. Peng-Robinson predictions for hydrocarbons,CO2,N2 and H2S with pure water and
NaCl brine ,I. Soreide and C.H. Whitson, Fluid Phase Equilibria,77:217-290
Black oil properties are traditionally referenced to surface or standard conditions. Properties
like gas to oil ratio, condensate to oil ratio and gas and oil FVFs allow the petroleum engineer
to relate surface production rates and volumes to the equivalent downhole amounts. All these
properties are path dependent.
In the past the path to surface was fairly straightforward composing of a straight flash to
standard conditions or at the passage of the fluid through a train of two or three separators.
Ever more complex surface facilities are being developed making the path difficult to define
and the various separation processes time-consuming to calculate.
Efforts have been made to develop a representation of the overall separation process which
simplify the calculations and give information on the traditional streams of oil and gas as well
as newer requirements such as LNG and LPG 135 .
In addition to the traditional paths of straight flash and separator train the program now allows
the surface plant to be represented by K values or Split Factors. The traditional separator
train has also enhanced by the addition of a train of chillers. This allows the separator gas to
be further processed into LPG and LNG streams.
Chiller trains are introduced within the surface facilities to separate methane from the other
gaseous products of the separation train.
The final methane-rich liquid is sold as LNG (liquefied natural gas). The other chiller products
are sold as gas or LPG (liquefied petroleum gas).
The overall efficiency of the separation processes is measured in terms of recovery.
With 1 mole of feed to the separators as the basis the recovery of any of the three products
is the mole fraction that exits the plant.
It should be noted that all products which cannot be identified as oil or LNG are labeled as
gas.
In this case all the gas produced by the separator train ends up as feed for the chillers. The
last chiller produces only liquid and this fluid are therefore labeled as LNG (liquefied natural
gas).
The liquid products from the other chillers are combined and labeled as GAS. This is also
commonly called LPG (liquefied petroleum gas).
The OIL is the liquid product from the stock tank.
This scheme can be represented within the CCE 330 and CVD 341 dialogs as:
Within the Separator Calculation 286 the same scheme would become:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 137
In this scheme only the first stage gas is sent to the chiller train. The last chiller produces only
liquid and this fluid are therefore labeled as LNG(liquefied natural gas).The OIL is the liquid
product from the stock tank. All other products from the separators and chillers are combined
and labeled as GAS.
This scheme can be represented within the CCE 330 and CVD 341 dialogs as:
The last scheme is where the last chiller does not produce a stream which is completely
liquid. In this case no LNG can be identified. All streams which are not oil are combined as
gas.
This is not a scheme which should be pursued as it offers very little more information than one
where no chillers have been defined.
The only additional information is the compositions and fractions of the fluids produced within
the chillers.
This information is available within the separator analysis display.
2.3.10.2 K Values
See also Separator Calculations and the Path to Surface 134 .
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 139
Ki yi / xi
Kvalues are the ratio of the mole fraction of component i in the gas yi to the mole fraction of i
in the liquid xi.
K Values are used as an alternative to multiple flashes to calculate the component separation
that occurs by passing a fluid through a separator train.
By avoiding the need for a flash they allow the EoS PVT calculations to proceed faster.
The values are used to calculate any property that requires a path to surface to be defined i.
e. GOR,CGR,Bo.
The GOR etc. calculated using K values will be accurate where the working composition is
closest to the composition used to derive the K Values.
Two types of K Value are available:
K values for each separator stage
One set of values that represent the total separator train
The single set covering all separator train will calculate faster but not be as accurate at lower
pressures.
Having a set for each separator is slower but more accurate over a wider range.
K Values can be used to represent complex separation processes or surface facilities. They
will however require periodic update as the plant and the feed compositions evolve.
yi values
yi values
xi values
K Values can be viewed and produced within PVTP from the Separator Calculation Analysis
362 Display,.
In addition the K value dialog 139 allows the user to enter, edit import and export K Values.
See Also:
Separators and Chillers 135
Split factors 144
Select Use K Value from the separator calculation method combo box and click on the View|
For each defined separator stage there is a K Value for each component.
The K Values can be
entered in the table provided
Imported in a *.pks file format using the Import K Vals button
Imported from another IPM suite program using the *.prp format 35
Transferred from the PVTP separator calculation via the separator analysis 362 dialog.
If multi-stage K values are used separator pressures and temperatures are required for each
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 141
stage.
If overall K values are used the pressure and temperature of stock tank conditions should be
entered as shown below
Any K Values entered can be exported in *.pks file format by clicking on the Export KVals
button
Clear Stream will clear the K value and separator data for the current stream.
See Also:
Separator Calculations and the Path to Surface 134 .
Separators and Chillers 135
Split factors 144
The options are to send out the K values in the *.pks file format by clicking on the Send to
File button or to transfer the values internally within the stream using the Copy to this
Stream button.
There is also the option to send out values that represent each stage or an overall set to
represent all the stages.
Simply select the set to be sent and click on the destination button.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 143
0 "NC5"
0.820698 1.00098 1.0013 1.37697
0 "C6"
1.12141e-006 6.05775e-007 3.26366e-008 2.57221e-008
0 "PS-1"
*
*# End of file
Surface Split Factors are used as an alternative to multiple flashes to calculate the component
separation that occurs by passing a fluid through a separator train.
Each split factor represents a fluid stream recovery on a component by component basis.
Three fluids are represented by the split factors VIZ OIL,GAS and LNG. See help on Chillers
and LNG calculations.
If the separator input feed has a composition given by Fi....n. mole fraction. The mole
recoveries for each component in each fluid stream becomes.
Zi oil Si oil Fi
Zi gas Si gas Fi
Zi gas Si gas Fi
where Zi is the moles produced of each component in each fluid and Si is the individual
component split factor for that fluid.
Summing the individual Zi values gives the recoveries for fluid .
Since
then
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 145
The compositions are then normalised to give the values in the usual form e.g.. for the oil
Zi oil
xi
Zioil
i
If a fluid does not exist the equivalent recovery and split factors will be set to zero
One set of split factors only represents one feed composition. To represent the many
variations in composition that enter the separator train, many sets of split factors are
required.
The program will then interpolate between the sets to give a values that better represent the
feed composition. The key to the interpolation is the concentration of a marker component.
This is normally taken as the heaviest component but this can be changed.
It is a weakness of the interpolated method that the calculation cannot handle effectively a
fluid which is outside the split factor range generated.
If only a gas table is generated for example the method would give a totally unrealistic result if
an oil composition is interpolated. Great care should be taken in the creation of the Surface
Split Factor tables.
See help on the use of chillers to calculate LNG recoveries and the background to Split
factors.
This dialog can be called from the CCE or CVD calculation screens by selecting Use Split
Factors as the separation method and clicking on the View/Calc Separator Split Factors
button that appears.
Alternatively this dialog can be accessed from the Separator Analysis Dialog (related topic 358 )
by clicking on the Export Split Fac button.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 147
Fluid Split Factors normally come as a series of tables. Each table represents a
Marker different composition which has been used to feed the separator/chiller
Component train.
The tables are differentiated from each other by the inclusion of the molar
concentration of the selected marker component.
As a default, the heaviest component is used. The combo box at the base of
this dialog allows the user to select between all the components in the
stream.
When finally utilised the split factor tables are interpolated, the key to the
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 149
Command buttons
Calc Split Factors Calculates the split factors using the options selected and calls the
Split Factor View|Export Dialog
View Split Factors If split factors exist this option calls the Split Factor View|Export
Dialog
Exit This option saves any changes that have been made and exits the
dialog
Cancel This option closes down the dialog ignoring any changes that have
been made
See help on the use of chillers to calculate LNG recoveries and the background to Split
factors.
This dialog can be called from the Split Factor Setup Dialog by calculating split factors or by
clicking on the View Split Factors button.
A typical dialog is shown below:
Note that the NLG split factors may not be available after calculation. NLG values will only be
available if a chiller train has been used for their creation.
In addition, the program has also to identify that NLG has in fact been produced by the
chillers. The test used is that the last chiller produces only liquid.
If this is not the case all the products from the chiller train are combined as gas.
Split factors imported may also only contain oil and gas. If this is the case the NLG recoveries
will be set to zero during any subsequent calculation using the split factors.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 151
Command buttons
Export The generated split factor table can be exported in Eclipse format.
Selecting this option calls a small dialog which allows the user to select
between the three output options VIZ GPTABLE3,GPTANBLEN and
GPTABLE.
This dialog also allows the user to select the range of Split Factor Tables
to be sent to file. The data is exported as an ASCII *.inc file.
Eclipse requires a table number to be given to this block of data. This
number is entered using the edit box provided. This value has no effect
other than to be added to the output file
Import The program allows the user to read an eclipse *.inc file in the three main
formats VIZ GPTABLE3,GPTANBLEN and GPTABLE. The information
retrieved depends on the format used.
The imported data must match the number of components in the target
stream. The tables imported are automatically ordered to aid in the
interpolation process
Copy Data to All This option allows the user to copy the currently viewed list of split
Streams factors to all the streams within the project file
Clear Table
Clicking on this button will clear the split factor table currently selected.
The tables are automatically reordered after this operation as the empty
table is sent to the back of the list
Clear All This operation will remove all split factor data from the currently selected
stream
Exit This option saves any changes that have been made and exits the dialog
Cancel This option closes down the dialog ignoring any changes that have been
made
where is the interfacial tension , P is the parachor and M is the molecular weight of the
substance. l and g are the densities of the liquid and gas.
This equation can be extended to mixtures of hydrocarbons and becomes:
Ml and Mg are the molecular weight of the gas and liquid at equilibrium. P x and y are the
component parachors, liquid and gas mole fractions respectively.
Reference:
Weinaug, C.F. and Katz,D.L "Surface Tension of Methane-Propane Mixtures" Ind. Eng. Chem.
(1943) 35,239-242
where is the volume of oil at reservoir conditions and is the resultant volume in
the stock tank. Since depends on the path to surface, Bo is also path dependent. The
volumes included in this formula could be calculated in a variety of ways. Within the PVTP
program the calculation is done on the basis that mass balance should be conserved.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 153
where GOR is the solution GOR of the oil and gas is the density of the gas produced at
surface conditions.
If mass is to be conserved:
giving
As the Bo is determined from a mass balance, that means that mass balance is forced
in the EOS. This honouring of mass balance has allowed to safely use methods like
Volume Shift, which as methodology would cause the mass to change in the path from
downhole to surface.
see also
Mass Balance Calculator 454
Every option selected has a visible result . The user will automatically be taken through the
necessary steps to enter data and perform calculations. The intention is to move from left to
right and top to bottom across the main applications menu.
To start PVTP, select the appropriate icon and press or double-click the program icon. A
screen similar to the following will appear:
The menu options across the top of the screen are the PVTP main menu options. Each is
described below.
File The File menu is a management menu with commands that enable to
open, save or create new data files. One can use this menu to move
between open files and set-up printer options
Options The Options menu is the starting point of PVT and the key to the
program. Use this menu to define the application and principal features
of the PVT model to be used. The options to select are unique to the
current file and apply until changed by the user, or another file is recalled.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 155
The PVT package can load multiple PVT Project Files each of which
occupies its own window.
The windows can be selected, cascaded, arranged and tiled via this
menu
2.4.1 Toolbar
Two toolbars are available below the main menu:
Main This toolbar contains the main options to create new files, open a file, save,
Toolbar manipulate streams
Data + Calc This toolbar contains access links to all the available calculations and
Toolbar regression features
Each icon represents one of the most used menu options. As the mouse pointer passes over
the icon a short description of the option is displayed in the Status line which is situated at the
bottom of the main PVT window.
2.4.2 Preferences
This section describes the options available from the File | Preferences menu option of the
main PVT menu.
Alternatively the dialogs can be called by hitting change within the options section of any
calculation display.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 157
The initial area covered is Calc General 157 . Other areas covered can be called by clicking on
the appropriate tab.
The areas are covered in sections called:
Directories 163
Regression 164
Units 166
View 167
2.4.2.1 General
The initial area covered is Calc General 157 . Other areas covered can be called by clicking on
Save As This button allows the user to set these options as the default set for any
Default new file that is created
Method This is a non-editable field that defines the PVT method in use (Black oil or
Equation of State). The field is set by the main program Options 168
Eq. of State The Equation of State to be used VIZ Peng Robinson or Soave Redlich
Kwong can be set here or within the Main Options Dialog
Use Peng This switches on/off the 1978 Peng Robinson correction by the acentric
Robinson AF factor ( ).
Correction The correction considers the following:
(PRCORR) for values of <0.49 the correction to the a(T) is by means of a
polynomial of of the second order
for values of 0.49 the correction to the a(T) is by means of a
polynomial of of the third order
Refer to EOS information 91 further in the user Guide.
The switch is by default on, which means that by default Peng Robinson
(1978) Equation of State is used. If the switch is disabled, then Peng
Robinson (1976) will be used, where the correction is a polynomial of the
second order only.
Volume This allows to change the Volume Shift set up for the active stream (the
Shift one that is selected in the main program panel)
Stream
Setting
Volume This option defines if any new EOS model is volume shifted or not. The
Shift volume shift can be applied to the Full composition and/or the Lumped
Default composition (if existing).
Settings NEW!!!
Each stream can have its own set up with regards to the Volume Shift.
This means that in one PVTP file there can be streams with and without
Volume Shift at the same time
Volume The volume shift type and parameters can be set selected by clicking on
Shift All the All Streams Volume Shift button.
Streams
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 159
The File| Preferences 157 dialog contains the volume shift control panel.
A typical display is shown below
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 161
The main body of this dialog is a grid which displays the parameters used to calculate volume
shift Vol Shift S . All data within the grid can be edited manually and stored. The grid has a
tab control to swap between streams.
In this screen it is possible to Clear all or only the pseudos' S values, Calculate all of only the
pseudo's S values.
Regarding the Method used to calculate the Si values, More background is provided the
This button allows the user to get a feel for the degree to which the volume shift is varying the
fluid properties. When pressed the program will flash the fluid to standard condition with and
without the shift on. The results are presented as shown below
Exit and Save closes down the dialog with all changes retained
Cancel closes down the dialog with all changes ignored
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 163
2.4.2.2 Directories
2.4.2.3 Regression
The variables within this dialog are normally set to the default values and should not be
changed for the majority of systems.
The chosen options can be saved as the default values and will be selected for any new files
created using the Save as Default button.
Regression Allow Regression Within the matching 267 and regression 278 operations,
with Pure the component properties used can be limited to
Component Tc, pseudo components by clicking on the checkbox
Pc, AF provided. Volume shift 99 matching can be separately
selected. Deselecting components is particularly
Allow Regression useful when preparing matches for applications where
with Pure the changing of pure component properties is
forbidden, for example in process simulation tool in the
Component Vol
context of preparing PVT models for fully integrated
Shift
models (from reservoir to process)
Maximum This value relates to the number of regression cycles
Number of which will be done before the calculation automatically
Steps exits. Raising the value will allow more time for a
slowly regressing system to find a solution . No upper
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 165
(default limit has been set , but any value lower than 10 will be
value 200) set to the lower allowed limit of 10
Optimize There are many steps which have been taken within
PSAT,CCE, PVT to speed up the regression .This speed up may
SEP,GRAD, cause problems with some very difficult compositions.
Regression This option allows the user to switch off the shortcuts,
forcing the calculations to proceed through the
for Speed
maximum number of checks. Due to its complexity,
(default CVD has been given a separate flag
value ON)
Optimize
CVD
Regression
for Speed
(default
value ON)
Property These values set the limit for variable movement
Range during regression.
Limit Multiplier The regression is initiated with a limit on each
property. The maximum allowed value is the current
value times the maximum multiplier. Similarly with the
minimum. The multipliers are for BICs are
independent of the rest. The range of allowed
movement can be reduced or enlarged on a stream
by stream basis
Phase Maximum (default value 500)
Determination Iterations There is a phase determination function which is used
throughout the Equation of State Calculations. The
function starts at a high pressure and goes down in
steps until a two phase area is detected. This value
limits the number of steps allowed before the function
is stopped with a single phase at all pressures
assumed. Increasing the value will slow down the
PVT calculations
Minimum (default value 0.5)
Pressure There is a phase determination function which is used
Step throughout the Equation of State Calculations. The
function starts at a high pressure and goes down in
steps until a two phase area is detected. This value
limits the smallest allowed step before the function is
stopped with a single phase at all pressures
assumed. Decreasing the value will slow down the
PVT calculations. Increasing the value may cause
Units are set up in detail within the Units Dialog. This dialog allows the user to set the
directory where the unit’s database file is stored and the units system to which a new file will
default to.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 167
2.4.2.5 View
This dialog allows to enable/disable features of the visualization of the main panel and dialogs
of PVTP.
Clicking on the Change Dialog Fonts calls the font dialog. This screen allows the user to
select a font for the heading and data text used within the screen.
First select a text type by clicking on a name in the list, then use the Font, Style and Size
combo boxes to choose the text characteristics that are required. An example of choice is
given in the dialog panel.
Clicking on OK will change the font in the summary screen and close down the selection
window .
Pressing Apply will change the screen without closing the window.
Selecting Cancel will close down the display without implementing the changes.
Clicking off the Embolden All Dialogs check box will reduce the weight of the screen font in
all dialogs.
The options to select are unique to the current file and apply until changed by the user, or
another file is recalled.
These options also determine the subsequent screens, menus and commands which are
displayed.
This menu is also used to define the input and output units of measurement. A flexible system
of units is provided allowing to customize the internal units system.
Options
Units
The Options dialog screen is used to define the characteristics of the PVT project. The
options selected establish the input data required and the calculation options available.
The selections made apply to the current session. The data entry screens, input fields and
variables are limited to those relevant to the particular application. Input options may be
changed at any stage of the processing. New choices may require other information to be
supplied. Therefore the user is advised to ensure that all relevant input is still valid for the
new option selection.
To access this screen click on Options within the Options menu or press ALT-O O.
Alternatively, click on the PVT Options Icon within the toolbar.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 169
Under the System options section, define the PVT model characteristics such as Method, fluid
type, Separation Stages, Equation of State, etc. These selections determine information that
the user will be required to enter later. The user Information and user Comments section of
the screen allows the user to enter data , comments and dates which help identify the project
and which are printed out in the report Input Data section .
Option Selection
To select an option, click on the arrow to the right of the required field. The list of available
choices will be displayed.
Method The first and most fundamental selection to be made is PVT Method. This
determines what model will be used and , consequently, the data input
required.
There are three methods currently defined:
Black Oil
Equation of State
Press on Method Name and/or.
See Separator topic 358 of the PVTP Manual for more details
Eq. of State This is only required for the Equation of State Method and involves the
selection of the specific cubic equation to be used.
The choice is between a series of equations provided via the main
calculation library
Peng-Robinson
Soave-Redlich-Kwong
Stream Volume This option is available only when Equation of State Method has been
Shift selected.
Each stream in PVTP can independently have or not the Volume Shift
enabled (NEW!!!). This is why the options available are:
Full
Lumped (in case Lumping/Delumping has been applied to
the stream)
and the switch is available for each selected stream.
This means that this setting is applied to the active stream (the one that is
selected in the main panel):
Volume Shift can be added to the Equation of State also using the
Preferences Dialog 157 .
All Streams This allows to access the dialog screen 160 were it is
possible to set volume shift for each stream
independently
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 171
Oil
Dry and Wet Gas
Retrograde Condensate
Separator (only when Black Oil has been selected)
Options available:
Single Stage
Two Stage
This section is designed to help the user keep track of which project is associated with the
PVT file data.
None of the entries are mandatory and none of the information entered in the boxes is
checked.
Entries available are:
Company
Field
Location
Platform
Analyst
This window allows the user to enter any comments which may be required to track the
history of the data or calculations within the PVT file.
To enter the comments area click the left hand mouse button when the cursor is over the
desired point.
A new line is entered in the comments block by typing Ctrl+Enter at the desired point.
Pressing the Date Stamp Button places the current date and time at the end of the
comments block.
The user Comments are printed as part of any PVT report.
This section describes the system of units. The built in flexibility of the units system enables
to select any variable and define the unit of measurement to be used. This feature makes it
possible to modify the units system so that it corresponds to data reports supplied by a
service company or customise the units system to suit own personal preferences.
PVTP always works internally in Field units.. To facilitate data entry and output display in any
units system, PVTP accepts data in the specified Input units and converts it to Field units for
calculation. The results (in Field units) are converted back to the specified Output unit set if
necessary. By making selections from the different categories, the user can work in the
preferred units and save the results in the units required by company policy.
The changes made to the units system are file specific, each holding its own unit set. The
program allows to create user-defined units system. To access the units system, point to
the Units menu and click the mouse, or click on the icon shown above.
Units Summary
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 173
Variables Select any item from the list of variables displayed. To select an item,
move the scroll box up or down, until the required variable appears on the
screen
Validation Used to set up the error checking limits for each selected input variable
Unit Systems
The following default Units Systems are provided:
Oilfield Units
Norwegian S.I.
Canadian S.I.
German S.I.
French S.I.
Latin S.I.
Customised unit systems can be created and saved under new names. Different units can be
selected for both input and output.
Find the required variable by scrolling through the list, then enter required changes in the low
and high validation limit boxes. Enter the custom validation limits in the units currently in use.
To permanently attach the new validation limits to a custom units system, click Save before
leaving the validation screen by clicking OK.
To save changes made to a Unit System within the Units Dialog 171 , click Save. The user will
be prompted to enter a name for the new Units System.
This new system can now be recalled and applied to any file. The ability to have separate
input and output unit systems allows the user to work with familiar units and to create reports
in any required unit system.
PVT calculates internally in S.I. Units.
If some particular units have been modified during the course of a PVT session, the changes
will be written into the .PVI file when the input data are saved. Irrespective of the current
units system settings, recalling a previously saved .PVI file will cause PVT to revert to the
units saved in the recalled .PVI file.
To permanently impose a new set of units on the recalled file, open a custom units file (or use
one of the internal unit sets) and then save the .PVI file.
The new units settings will be used whenever the .PVI file is loaded.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 175
BLACK OIL 91
EQUATION OF STATE 91
The Black Oil Method originated as a series of empirical oil correlations. With time, the
methodology was extended to cover gases and condensates. The input and correlation
options change with fluid type. Use the Fluid Type listbox to match the fluid under study.
Depending on the Method, options of one, two, or multiple stage separator inputs may be
available.When a Black Oil is used, the PVT summary screen and its icon toolbar adjust to
provide the correct information and menu options. A typical Summary Screen is shown below.
The example chosen is a Retrograde Condensate fluid using the Black Oil Method 91 .
Black Oil Modelling techniques originated with oils and subsequently spread to gases and
condensates.
The basis of the method is the use empirical correlations to calculate oil characteristics.
Matching with measured data is used to select the best fitting correlation for the oil being
studied.
The correlations available are:
for Pb,Rs,Bo
1) Glaso et al
2) Standing et al
3) Lasater et al
4) Vasquez-Beggs
5) Petrosky
for Viscosity
1) Beal et al
2) Beggs et al
3) Petrosky
STEP 1 Select Black Oil /Oil from the Options display using the icon below:
STEP 2 the black oil properties of the fluid is entered via the the Data | Input Data
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 177
menu selection or using the icon below. See Black Oil Input Dialog
STEP 3 Enter the known PVT characteristics of the oil within the Lab Data / Match
display using the icon below.
STEP 4 Use the Regression option to optimize the match parameters. The
regression display is called via the Data | Regress option or using the icon
below.
STEP 5 Use the Calculate dialogs to provide the information required. Use the icon
below to set up the calculation ranges.
See also
Black Oil Toolbar 177
Black Oil - Oil 178
Black Oil - Dry and Wet Gas 184
Black Oil - Retrograde Condensates 185
To select an option, place the pointer over the icon button and press the left-hand mouse
button.
Selecting Options
Changing Units
Enter Separator and Reservoir Data 178
Enter Lab Data 178
Regress to Lab Data 178
Perform Calculations 178
The steps below can be followed to define a black oil model for oil:
Input Data Select the Data | Input Data option from the main menu to display the
following PVT Input data screen:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 179
For each match data table, enter the temperature and bubble point,
then enter pressure versus gas oil ratio, oil FVF and oil viscosity.
Where data is incomplete or not available, leave the field blank
Regression This option is used to perform the non-linear regression which adjusts
the correlations to best fit laboratory measured PVT data. The non-
linear regression matching technique can be used on up to five PVT
match tables, each with a different temperature. The following PVT
properties can be used as match variables:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 181
Calculations In order to make a plot or listing of fluid property data, PVT must first
calculate the values over a specified range of temperatures and
pressures. Using the calculated data point’s plots of fluid properties
versus temperature or pressure can be generated. The following is
an example of the Calculate | Calculations screen. If the correlations
have been matched, then the fluid properties will be calculated using
the modified correlations.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 183
Plotting the The calculated data can be displayed on a plot. The variables which
Calculated Data are plotted are defined under the Variables option on the plot. After
performing a PVT calculation click on Plot from the PVT calculation
screen.
Carefully examine the PVT plots for consistency with the match data.
If necessary, select a different correlation and repeat the PVT
calculations until the results are satisfactory.
Input Data When Dry and Wet Gas is selected as the PVT option, the following Input
data screen is displayed:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 185
Match Data Please refer to Match data in Oil PVT section 178 . The following fluid
properties can be matched:
GOR
Z factor (gas compressibility factor)
Gas FVF
Gas viscosity
All other operations are carried out as for Oil PVT 178
Input Data When Retrograde Condensate (Black oil) Method is selected the following
input data screen is displayed:
Enter the required data. Note if tank GOR and tank gas gravity are
unknown, they can be left at 0. For such cases, the total produced GOR
should be entered under separator GOR. Condensate gravity is at
standard conditions.
The temperature and dew point must be entered for each set of
match data.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 187
CAUTION: When matching oil density, there should be no input pressure higher
than Dew Point, since the oil density does not exist beyond that point
All other operations are carried out as for Oil PVT 178 .
Stream
A stream is the main structure for holding data within a PVT file. A project must have at least
one stream. Each stream is independent with the following data contained within it:
Composition This is the identification of the components, the mole percents of each and
the component properties. The composition may be grouped and/or
matched.
The most important element of this set of data is the Working
Composition. This contains the components, composition and properties
which can be viewed and manipulated via the View Properties display
(see below 247 ). This composition is the one which is stored with the PVT
file and used as the basis for Regression and the other PVT EoS
calculations.
The View Properties Display allows the user to manually change any
component property within the Working Composition.
The first step in producing a composition is to select components from one
of the package databases. This is combined with values generated for
Pseudo Components to produce the Initial Composition. At this stage the
Working Composition and the Initial Composition are the same.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 189
Match Data Match or Lab Data is held separately for each stream, allowing the
streams to be individually regressed upon. See Match Data for more
information on the types of entry required
Regression Data Regression selections i.e. processes to be matched to and properties
used in matching are held for each stream. See Regression Parameters
for more details
See also:
Select Components 189 this display has an option to add an empty stream
Edit Mole Percents 215 streams can be copied and their compositions edited using this
option
Add_Stream 413 copies existing streams or imports streams from other files
Delete_Stream 415 removes unwanted streams
Edit_Stream_details 412 change stream name and comment
PSEUDO STORAGE
An additional smaller storage area is provided for Pseudo Properties for each stream via the
Pseudo Properties Display. This allows the initial values or a later selected set to be held as
the active values are worked upon.
The next step is to select components from the Petroleum Experts database or one of the
user databases.
The display which is used for component selection is shown below. This screen can be called
by clicking on the Select Components from list option within the Data menu or on the icon
shown above.
Input fields
Components The program automatically fills the Components list box with the
component names in a short label and longer, more descriptive, form.
Components can be selected or de-selected by clicking on the
component name. The number of components chosen is given on the
display.
Up to 200 components can be selected
Num Pseudo If pseudo components are required, the number needed should be
Components entered in the edit box provided
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 191
Main database This selects the database of components and properties in use in the
program
User Created This reports the list of components present in a User-defined
database 192
User Database This selection menu allows to import in PVTP a User-defined
database 192
Command buttons
See also
User Database Entry 192
A more extensive user database can be setup using the database create 464 , import and edit
dialogs. This may contain the same components as the Petroleum Experts' database with
different properties, or components which are not covered by the Petex database. The user
database points are held within an ASCII file with a UDB extension. The directory where these
files are stored is saved within the PROSPER.ini file. This directory can be set using the Set
user database Directory button which calls the user Database Directory 465 dialog. If any *.
UDB files exist their names will be displayed in the combo box provided. If the file has been
created with user data, but the specific UDB file is not on the users machine the components
will be listed within the user area for identification but cannot be extended or reset to the
original *.UDB values.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 193
detail all the species involved or the resulting properties of the mixture. If C12 is selected as a
component within the program, the package must provide an average value which is likely to
be inconsistent. In addition the regression and flash calculation complexity increases as the
square of the number of components.
Therefore increasing the number of components slows down the calculations, without
necessarily improving accuracy.
Based on quite a large experience we have found it better to stop at C7 + and split than to
add more reported components.
The additional component information is however useful in gas condensates to identify the
amount and relative molecular weights of the very heavy material.
It can be advantageous to combine nC4 and iC4 and nC5 and iC5. This reduces the number
of components and speeds up all calculations. However, if an integrated model is being
produced including surface simulation, it is necessary to include the iC4 and iC5 along with the
nC4 and nC5.
See Selecting Components from List 189 .
The next step is to select components and provide a composition. This can be done by
selecting components from a database list 189 or by transferring data as a table from the
clipboard to the program. The last option is described here.
The display which is used for component table entry is shown below. This screen can be
called by clicking on the Enter Components as Table option within the Data menu or on the
icon shown above.
The principle behind this dialog is that data in the form of component names and compositions
will be pasted from an electronic report or spreadsheet into the two columns provided. The
program will then attempt to identify the component from the name either in the Petroleum
Experts database or any user database that is loaded.The identification process is triggered
by clicking on the Verify button. If the identification is incomplete the user can change any
component by clicking on the Select button at the end of the appropriate line. This will bring
up the Component Identification Dialog 197 .
Normal procedure would be:
1) Select data that will be transferred i.e. names composition or both.
2) Place the data on the clipboard.
3) Click on the Copy/Paste button. This will produce a display like the one below:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 195
4) Click on Verify to start component identification. The display will change to something
like this
5) If some components have not been identified or have been wrongly identified click on
the appropriate Select button to bring up the Component Identification Dialog 197 . If
everything is correct click on Enter Composition to proceed to the Enter Composition
Dialog 203 and beyond.
This section allows the user to select the composition input mode. This may be as mole
percent or fraction. As an alternative, weight percent or fraction may be used by choosing
weight from the combo box provided.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 197
This add-on can be loaded with a user database 463 which can be selected within this section
of the dialog. Any entries will be compared with the Petroleum Experts database and then
the user database for a match.
The user can choose between the four types of component available using the radio buttons
or clicking on a component name. Any other selection than pseudo component requires a
selection from the appropriate listbox.
See help on user Databases 463 .
2.7.4 Recombination
This display is called by clicking on the Recombination button within the Select Data base
dialog.
Recombination can either be used as:
A method of calculating the reservoir composition from separator and stock tank
compositions and volumetric properties or,
A quality check on feedstock analysis i.e. By comparing the recombined
composition with the lab reported composition
Mode
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 199
The recombination calculation comes in two modes. The default version is Simplified. The
mode can be changed using the radio buttons at the top right of the display. The simplified
mode reflects the basic recombination done in most PVT reports. The table inputs and
controls are the same as those described in more detail below for the extended mode
version.
One oil and one gas composition is entered. These are normally from a separator test.
Additional inputs include an oil density and either gas density or gas gravity. The GOR
entered must be referenced to Stock Tank conditions. The average molecular weight can be
entered directly or, alternatively, it can be calculated automatically from the composition
entered for the oil and the molecular weight of each component. For non-pseudos the
molecular weight is taken from the Petroleum Experts database. Pseudo molecular weights
must be entered, either on this dialog or via the Pseudo Properties Display.
The table at the top of the display allows the user to enter the required compositions. The first
column contains the result of any recombination which has been previously carried out. For
comparison purposes, the second column gives the current reservoir composition (if one has
been entered).
Next follow the entry columns for stock tank oil, stock tank gas and separator gas. To enter a
number, click on the appropriate cell, type in the number, click away or hit tab.
After each entry, the program will automatically calculate and display the composition total
and the average molecular weight of the column. On calculating the result of recombination,
the program checks that each column total, if used, equals 100.
Only separator stages for which data exists should be filled in.
The program ignores any separator stages with a zero total composition.
The recombination calculation is basically a mass balance. To achieve this balance additional
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 201
data is required. The Stock tank oil density is needed along with the oil’s average molecular
weight to relate oil composition in moles to volume.
An entry box is provided for oil density. The average molecular weight can be entered directly
or, alternatively, it can be calculated automatically from the composition entered for the oil
and the molecular weight of each component. For non-pseudos the molecular weight is taken
from the Petroleum Experts database. Pseudo molecular weights must be entered, either on
this dialog or via the Pseudo Properties Display.
Data is also required to link the amount of gas produced with respect to the stock tank oil.
This is entered in the form of GOR data for the stock tank and the utilised separator stages.
NOTE: All GOR data must be entered with respect to Stock Tank Barrels (STB)
The only other additional information required is the temperature of the stock tank and
separator stages. This information is used to relate moles of gas to volumes.
Command buttons
Recombine When all entries have been made, press the Recombine button to
initiate the calculation. The results will appear in the first column of the
table
Copy Rec. to If one wishes the recombined fluid to become the reservoir
Comp. composition, copy the data across by clicking on the Copy Rec to
Comp button
Exit and Save Leave this dialog using the Exit and Save button if one wishes any
results and/or changes to be recorded
Cancel Cancel will close down the dialog with the loss of any changes which
may have been made
Units Units will bring up the standard units dialog, allowing the user to
modify units without going out to the main display
Quick Calc The Quick Calc button allows the user to the small calculation menu
(below).When this is called the recombined fluid composition is used
to produce a temporary stream which is the used to calculate phase
envelopes, saturation pressure etc.
The program at this point will create a temporary stream using the
recombined composition. Calculations, including a phase envelope,
can be carried out with this composition and compared directly with
the other stream results.
See Quick Calculation topic 384 for more details
Cancel Will close down the dialog with the loss of any changes which may
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 203
This dialog acts upon the working composition of the selected Stream. The active stream can
be changed via the TABS at the bottom of the composition grid. See PVT Project Data
Structure 188 for a more detailed description of streams.
The display which is used for composition input is shown below. This screen can be called by
clicking on the Enter Composition... option within the Data menu or on the icon shown above.
It is also automatically brought up when Enter Composition is pressed on the Select
Components from list 189 dialog or Enter Components as Table 193 dialog.
Input fields
The display is made up of several sections:
Component Data For every component name, type, composition and molecular weight
data is tabulated.The component names can be edited at this point.
Compositions can be pasted into the table here using Ctrl + V. This
operation may be better done, however, in the Enter Components as
Table 193 dialog. A running total and remainder for the composition is
shown at the bottom of the dialog
Composition Input
Options
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 205
These numbers are entered in the units displayed at the right hand
side of the box. See Units Help if another set of units is required.
Please note that these variables can also be changed by using the
Reference Data 259 option within the Data menu
Grouping/Matching
The 2 boxes within this area indicate whether the current file is
Grouped or Matched to Laboratory Data. Either condition may be
destroyed by choosing the Exit and Save ,Pseudo Properties or View
options within this display. Several choices within this dialog are
designed to operate with ungrouped compositions. A composition
which has been grouped and/or matched after grouping will revert to
the ungrouped composition. If any function is chosen which might
result in loss of data, the warning shown below is issued.
User Database If any components are derived from data bases other than the
Components 463 Petroleum Experts database the components will be identified by the
user DB type
Streams containing
Water
Command Buttons
The control buttons have the following functions:
Exit and This option registers the changes made and closes down the display
Save
Cancel This option shuts down the display and ignores any changes which have
been made
Pseudo This option activates the Pseudo Properties 220 dialog which allows the user
Props to enter all the properties for the pseudo components or use a correlation
to calculate them. This option will destroy any grouping or matching which
may have been done
To view the properties of a Grouped or Matched file the View Properties 247
option within the Data menu should be chosen
BI This option calls the Binary Interaction Coefficients 216 Display dialog which
Coefficients allows the user to enter all the Binary Interaction Coefficients for any or all
component pairs or use a correlation to calculate them. The basis for using
Binary Interaction Coefficients is described in EoS modeling 97
View This option brings up the full View Properties 247 display which allows the
user to view and change all the component properties, binary interaction
coefficients etc of the pure components. This option will destroy any
grouping or matching which may have been done
To view the properties of a Grouped or Matched file the View Properties 247
option within the Data menu should be chosen
Quick Calc A subset of the Equation of State Calculations is available by clicking on
the Quick Calc. control button within the Recombination; Enter Composition
and View Properties displays.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 207
This feature provides the user with access to a subset of the calculation
menu as a means of checking the consistency of the entered composition
information.
Calculation modes
The small display above provides options to calculate:
Calculate Maximum 388 This allows to determine the amount of water that
Water in the 388 saturates the hydrocarbon. A bigger quantity of
Hydrocarbon Phase 388 water would form a separate liquid phase
Input fields
Options The major model options are displayed. Only one set are
allowed per file.
The display which is used for composition editing is shown below. This screen can be called
by clicking on the Edit Composition option within the Data menu or on the icon shown above.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 209
This dialog provides comprehensive access to all the editing features within the program. All
the visible properties including the component name can be edited.(see also View Properties
247 ). Components can be inserted, deleted, moved, imported, split, lumped and set to a
specific value.
The user is asked if the stream should be copied prior to entering this dialog. An exact copy
with the same name plus a number will be produced.
Input fields
The display is made up of several sections:
Function buttons
Command Buttons
The command buttons have the following functions:
Exit and Save This option registers the changes made and closes down the display
Cancel This option shuts down the display and ignores any changes which
have been made
Copy Stream This will create a copy of the stream currently selected within the
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 211
stream list
B.I.Coeffs..... Clicking on this button will call the Binary Interaction Coefficient 216
dialog allowing the user to view or change these values
Quick Calc A subset of the Equation of State Calculations is available by clicking
on the Quick Calc. control button within the Recombination; Enter
Composition and View Properties displays.
Calculation modes
The small display above provides options to calculate:
Input fields
Options The major model options are displayed. Only one set
are allowed per file.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 213
This dialog is called from the Composition Editor. Components may be imported from a
stream within this file or from any PVTP file.
Select the source from the top list box. The user can then choose to select from any
component within the stream or only from the pseudo components. If the latter option is
selected, the Component Import Select 214 dialog will be loaded with all pseudos selected.
2.7.6.1.1 Component Import Select
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 215
This dialog is called from the Composition Editor 208 import component option. The example
shown has been selected as all pseudos from the Component Import 214 dialog. Components
can be selected by clicking on the name within the list box or on the line numbers within the
table. A label can be used to identify the source of the component. This can be added as a
prefix or suffix. When the selections have been made click on the Import button to return to
the composition editor dialog.
NOTE:
If the stream being copied is grouped the new stream will become
one with only pseudo components , each group being replaced by a
pseudo with the same properties. This is required as no information
is available to the program on how the new percents should be
spread across the components making up the group.
NOTE:
When a composition is grouped, the components within each group
can be seen by clicking on the group name and clicking on the
dropdown box arrow that appears.Clear will remove all
percentages from a selected stream if editing is available for that
stream ( the background colour is white)
See also:
PVT PROJECT STRUCTURE 188 . -where streams fit in to the overall data structure
ADD STREAM 413 - copies existing streams or imports streams from other files
COMPOSITION EDITOR 208 - this dialog offers more edit features including the change of
composition.
The grid displayed shows the pseudo properties of the currently active stream. The stream
being acted upon can be changed via the TABS at the bottom of the grid.
See PVT Project File Structure 188 for a more detailed description of streams.
The basis for using Binary Interaction Coefficients is described in EoS modeling 97 . As with
pseudo properties, it is very important that care is taken in the choice of coefficients. Again no
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 217
correlation will accurately model all mixtures. The BI Coefficient acts as matching variable
which bends the idealized cubic Equation of state to meet the measured properties of the real
mixture.
It is therefore, advisable to try several options within this display to be confident to have a
match for the project conditions (see also Hint on Method 230 ).
A typical screen is shown below.
Two combo boxes are available at the top of the display which allows the user to select a
correlation.
There are three choices for pure components i.e.
Peng Robinson
Soave Redlich Kwong
Chevron Method (NEW!!!)
Choose an option from the combo box by clicking on the down arrow and then clicking on the
selection.
Command buttons
Calculate New After selecting the method of calculation for the BICs, this option will
Values calculate the BIC.
Set max value to It is possible to limit the highest value of BICs used by entering a value
in this field and selecting the Set Values button.
When selecting Set Values, the program will search for any previously
entered BIC in the table that is higher than the entered maximum limit
and will reset it to the maximum value
This option is useful whenever one wants to lower the saturation
pressure ad reproduce measured values
Zero range From This option sets a range of BICs to zero
Exit and Save Register the changes made and closes down the window. It is also
advisable to save the file if many edits have been made
Cancel This option shuts down the display and ignores any changes which
have been made
Reset Pure This option sets all non-pseudo components to zero
Reset All This option sets all components to zero
Quick Calc A subset of the Equation of State Calculations is available by clicking
on the Quick Calc. control button within the Recombination; Enter
Composition and View Properties displays.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 219
Calculation modes
The small display above provides options to calculate:
Input fields
Options The major model options are displayed. Only one set
are allowed per file.
The pseudo name defaults to PS-1, PS-2 etc. This may be changed to something more
meaningful by clicking within the name box and editing the name. All subsequent displays will
show the new name.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 221
The grid displayed shows the mole percents and properties of the currently active stream.
The stream being acted upon can be changed via the TABS at the bottom of the grid. See
PVT Project Data Structure 188 for a more detailed description of streams.
Input Fields
Correlations for Select the correlation that can be used to estimate the pseudo
Boiling Point and components' properties.
Tc, Pc, Vc and As no correlation will accurately model all pseudo components, it is
Omega advisable to try several options within this display to be confident in
the match.
See Hint on Method 230 for some direction.
Pseudo This is a table describing the different pseudo components (or splits)
Properties and their properties.
It is very important that care is taken in setting pseudo component
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 223
Excluding Pseudos
As a default all pseudo components will get involved in all calculations such as Automatching
or Recombine All. Clicking on the button within the Use first column of the grid will exclude any
pseudo as shown below. Clicking again will include the pseudo.
Command Buttons
The control buttons have the following functions:
Exit and Save This option registers the changes made and closes down the display
Cancel This option shuts down the display and ignores any changes which
have been made
Order Clicking on this button will re-order by molecular weight the pseudo
components within the selected stream. The smallest pseudo will be
first , the largest will be last
Edit All This option brings up the Composition Editor 208 dialog. This display
allows the user to move,delete,import components etc
Quick Calc A subset of the Equation of State Calculations is available by clicking
on the Quick Calc. control button within the Recombination; Enter
Composition and View Properties displays.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 225
Calculation modes
The small display above provides options to calculate:
Input fields
Options The major model options are displayed. Only one set
are allowed per file.
See also
AutoMatching of Densities and Viscosities 230
Pseudo Splitting 227
Original Numbers Store 232
Automatic and Manual Mode 227
Hint on Method 230
Advanced Splitting 233
Split Profile Dialog 245
Decontamination 261
Step by Step Guide 472
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 227
Automatic In this mode the pseudo properties are calculated using the correlation
chosen from the Options section.
The top combo box contains 3 options for calculating the pseudo component
boiling point viz.
Petroleum Experts
A.N. Other Correlation
Standing and katz
The bottom combo box contains 9 alternative methods for calculating the
acentric factor (Omega) and the critical temperature, pressure and volume of
a pseudo component, viz.
TWU/Edmister
Bergman(PNA) and Cavett
Bergman(PNA) and Cavett/Edmister
Cavett/Edmister
Mathew, Roland and Katz/Edmister
Robinson and Peng(PNA)
Lee and Kessler/Edmister
Riazi and Daubert/Edmister
Choose an option from the combo box by clicking on the down arrow and then
clicking on the selection.
The % aromatics within the properties grid allows the user to fix a limit on the
% used within the various calculations.
To fix the value enter the required number in the appropriate edit box. To
remove the limit blank out the value within the edit box.
After choosing the options press Calc Values
Manual In this mode all the pseudo properties can be entered or adjusted by the user.
To change a value, click or double-click inside the appropriate box, type in the
number and tab or click away
The Pseudo Components represent the largest source of unknowns within a mixture. They
also tend to have a significant influence on the overall mixtures characteristics. It is logical,
therefore, to concentrate on the pseudo properties when matching and regression operations
are being done. Sometimes the number of pseudos does not provide enough freedom to carry
out the matching required. One option for overcoming this situation is to split the last pseudo
into two or more components. Surface facilities may also require ten or more pseudos to
model surface separation processes.
The program offers a facility to do this in a controlled manner.
The pseudo can be split in various ways. The options available are described in more detail in
Pseudo Component Splitting 119 within the modeling section. Basically, the pseudo selected,
normally the last, is split out into up to 200 components before being regrouped into the the
required number of pseudos.
Last Pseudo This would be the normal mode where the last usually the largest
pseudo is split
All pseudos With this option all the available pseudos are recombined before the
splitting operation takes place. Note that psudos can be excluded
from this operation by clicking on the Use column( see Pseudo
Properties Dialog 220 )
Selected Selecting this option produces a combo box which lists the pseudos
available
Method
The combo box allows the user to select between the splitting methods within the program
VIZ.
Each method corresponds to a different way of describing the components' distribution within
the defined pseudo component
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 229
Follow This feature allows the user to determine all or part of the component
Profile distribution. this can be extremely helpful in dealing with contamination or
fluids with distinctive distributions e.g. biodegraded fluids. To set up a
profile click on the Setup Profile button within the Pseudo Properties 220 or
the Advance Splitting 233 dialogs. This brings up the Split Profile 245 dialog
where the relevant data can be entered. When the distribution is
recalculated the split algorithm will give the components the values
defined and follow a declining distribution for the rest.
This methodology is key to the decontamination 261 procedure.
Setup Clicking on this button will bring up the Split Profile 245
Profile dialog. This is used within the decontamination
procedure 261 .
Whitson The most recent and most flexible method. This uses a gamma function to
Method produce a distribution which an vary considerably in shape.
See Pseudo Component Splitting 119 within the modeling section for more on all these methods
Function buttons
Recombine All Clicking on this button will initiate the lumping of all pseudos back to
a single pseudo component
Split in 2 When selected the pseudo is split out using the method and species
selected. The split components are then regrouped to as close to 2
equal molar parts as can be found. The suggested practice for
condensates is to Split in 2 three or four times, automatching after
each splitting operation( see Step by Step Guide 472 )
Advanced This option calls the Advanced Splitting 233 dialog which has more
facilities to produce the split required
See also
Pseudo Properties Dialog 220
AutoMatching of Densities and Viscosities 230
Original Numbers Store 232
Automatic and Manual Mode 227
Hint on Method 230
Advanced Splitting 233
Split Profile Dialog 245
Decontamination 261
Step by Step Guide 472
The following correlations can be used for the calculation of BPts, Tc, Pc, Vc and Omega
(AF):
Within the PVT package two liquid densities are calculated by two different methods. The first
is based on a choice of empirical correlation. The second is calculated from the Equation of
State Z factor. The density correlations 116 available are Standing and Katz or Costald. The
choice is made from the combo box provided
Experience has shown that the Standing and Katz value which is derived mainly from specific
gravities is always fairly close to the measured density at standard conditions. Costald is
used extensively in surface facilities modeling and also gives good results in most cases. The
results are however very sensitive to the value of Costald Volume and Acentric Factor and Tc
which are calculated from the property correlation. See Automatic and Manual Mode 227 for
more information on property correlation selection.
The Equation of State value suffers from the main problem of the method i.e. the EoS
equation will not generally predict an accurate value from initial entries. Matching to laboratory
data must always be done before any calculated value can be used with confidence.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 231
A wayward set of EoS parameters normally shows up as a large deviation between the two
density values when the mixture is subject to a Constant Composition Expansion at standard
conditions (60 deg F , 1 atm)
This method allows the user to tune the parameters of the greatest unknowns within the
mixture i.e. the pseudos to bring the densities in line.
We advise that this option is used right at the start after the mixture composition has been
entered, however, if an existing file is being used enter the procedure below at step 3
The complete method would then be (see also Step by Step Guide 472 ):
1. Select a NEW PVT file and enter Equation of State Options 168
3. Select Pseudo Props option from the Composition Entry 203 Display to bring up this
dialog
The matching will halt when a match has been found to within o.2% or 100 iterations have
been completed. If no match is made try adjusting the pseudo properties or selecting new
options in step 6
8. With densities OK now use the binary interaction coefficient(s) to match the saturation
pressure at reference conditions. Normally only one coefficient (heaviest component -
lightest component ) is required (see Step by Step Guide 472 ). This matching does not
greatly affect the densities.
When this procedure is followed most petroleum mixtures will immediately give close to the
measured values e.g. separator GOR, liquid dropout etc. Any differences can be readily
reduced using the PVT packages regression 274 functions.
This procedure is normally carried out with zero-ed Binary Interaction Coefficients . Auto
Match automatically stores and zeros the BI Coefficients . After matching the coefficients are
restored. The check box on the display allows the user to skip the zeroing step , giving more
flexibility with difficult mixtures.
The option of Use original pseudo props from Store can be very valuable when a
condensate is being matched. Normally this type of fluid requires splitting.
This option will try and match the liquid density at STD to the same Costald or Standing-Katz
density determined on the basis of the Stored pseudo component.
This option is useful to make sure to reproduce the same density at STD as the one that has
been found at the beginning of the matching process, no matter if the pseudo component is
split.
When splitting occurs the Standing and Katz value of the mixture changes a little i.e. the
Automatch reference drifts away from its original accurate value. To prevent this, the
automatch process can be told to use the original unsplit value from the pseudo store to
calculate the Standing Katz density by putting this option on. Care should be taken however to
make sure the stored value is valid.
Since Volume Shift directly affects density an opportunity is given on this display to control this
feature. See Volume Shift Help 99 for more details.
AutoMatching of Viscosities
Selecting AutoMatch will also automatch the viscosity of an oil. This changes the Vc values to
bring the Lohrenz , Bray and Clark (LBC) calculated oil viscosity to a more reasonable level.
See Viscosity Modeling 123 .
By default, this operation will automatically be carried out if the AutoMatch button is operated.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 233
Since Pseudo Component data is the key to the characterisation of petroleum mixtures, it is
important to keep track of the link to the initial lab data. Some operations carried out on
pseudo properties e.g. splitting can destroy the original entries. The program contains a
facility to Store, View and Restore the original or a designated set of entries for pseudo
properties. The program will automatically store the first encountered data when this dialog is
exited using the Exit and Save button. Pressing View will display the current contents of the
store can be used at any time to overwrite the store with the values within the Pseudo
Properties Table. Restore will take the values from the store and use them to replace those
within the Pseudo Properties Table.
The Pseudo Components to Original Values option within the Data Reset Display 249 acts in
a similar way to the Restore option, taking values from the store and replacing those in the
Working PVT composition.
The Advanced Splitting Dialog is called via the Advanced button on the Pseudo Properties 220
display.
As the name implies this display allows the user to have more control over how pseudo
splitting is done, both in terms of the distribution of components and where the split limits are
set.
This can be very beneficial in:
dealing with difficult fluids
providing a better match when use of pure component properties for matching is
restricted
operating with multiple samples at varying depths
decontaminating samples
creating multiple pseudos to help in surface separation calculation
Normally, this operation would be carried out on a single pseudo e.g. C7+ or C10+ and typical
display would be:
The table shows how the splitting algorithm has broken down the pseudo component giving
each C number a composition . From the composition the program corrects the database
MWts and SGs to match the pseudo from which the table was created. The split method
determines the shape of the composition distribution. Use the combo box to change the split
method. The split will recalculate automatically if the selection is changed. Alternatively, press
recalculate split to activate the calculation.
The methods currently available are :
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 235
Petroleum This method is an upgrade of the Original Method to give more consistent
Experts 1 results. Method 1 was retained for backwards compatibility
Petroleum The distribution of components is made up of a single falling exponential
Experts 2 function.
Follow This feature allows the user to determine all or part of the component
Profile distribution. this can be extremely helpful in dealing with contamination or
fluids with distinctive distributions e.g. biodegraded fluids. To set up a
profile click on the Setup Profile button within the Pseudo Properties 220 or
the Advanced Splitting 233 dialogs. This brings up the Split Profile 245 dialog
where the relevant data can be entered. When the distribution is
recalculated the split algorithm will give the components the values
defined and follow a declining distribution for the rest.
This methodology is key to the decontamination 261 procedure.
Setup Clicking on this button will bring up the Split Profile 245
Profile dialog. This is used within the decontamination
procedure .
261
Whitson The most recent and most flexible method. This uses a gamma function to
Method produce a distribution which an vary considerably in shape.
See Pseudo Component Splitting 119 within the modeling section for more on all these
methods.
Manual Splitting
Once an initial distribution is settled upon, the user can then define how the lumping or
regrouping is done. The number of required splits can be typed in or set using the + and -
buttons. Any number up to the displayed maximum can be entered.
Select the number of pseudos to be created and hit the Set Even Split button. The display
will change to one like this:
The split boundaries are confirmed by the table colours and the details which have appeared
for the new 3 pseudo components.
The split can be changed from this even distribution by clicking on + and - beside the newly
defined pseudos.
Once the split is defined the program automatically calculates a MWT and SG for each
pseudo. From these values and a correlation a BPt. is set. From the BPt and a second
correlation all the important EoS numbers are calculated for the pseudo. As for the Pseudo
Properties display, the correlation can be selected by the user using the combo boxes
provided.
Whitson Method
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 237
The dialog options change when the Whitson method is selected. See Whitson Splitting
Options 238 for more details.
Split Preferences
These include:
1) Selecting the method used to adjust both the SG and the MWts of the split out
components to renormalize back to the input pseudo values. Available are:
Adjusting all values
Adjusting only the final value
Doing no adjustments
2) Setting a maximum value for SG and MWt within the split out components
3) Viewing and selecting within the databases available for the extended S.G and MWt
properties. The user can also create and export a customized database from this dialog.
More options are available within the Split Preferences 240 dialog.
Recalculate This button allows to recalculate the pseudo components' distribution after
Split any change in the Method or the options in use
Automatch The AutoMatch 230 feature is also proved on this display to allow the user
to work on the new pseudo values prior to accepting the results. Using
Automatch does not affect the split it changes only some of the properties
associated with the resultant pseudos
BI Coeffs Similarly , the user is provided with access to the Binary Interaction
Coefficients 216 Dialog from this display
Quick This button brings up the standard Quick Calc 384 display , allowing the
Calc user to calculate the effects of the completed split
Plot This option removes all pseudos which have been created and returns the
display to a single pseudo entry. Plotting allows the user to see the trend
in compositions and properties.
Clear Erase all the modifications
Exit and Click on this button when all the changes that have been made are ok.
Save This will return the program to the Pseudo Properties display
Cancel This option clears all changes and returns the program to the Pseudo
Properties display
Copy This option is useful for complex systems where samples have been
Stream taken at various depths and a compositional gradient analysis is to be
Split done to prove linkage between the samples. If another stream within the
file has been through a splitting operation and the detailed information on
the split is stored. ,the file name will appear in the list box. Selecting the
stream name and clicking on Copy stream Split will cause the program to
match the current streams split to the one stored for the other stream.
This synchronization of pseudos helps the streams to be similarly
characterized and the compositional gradients of each stream to align
See also
Pseudo Properties dialog 220
Decontamination 261
Three parameters are used within the Whitson gamma distribution i.e. alpha, beta and eta.
The main shape function is alpha and this is always a user input. To find the effect of the
alpha value change the entered number and click on Recalculate Split.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 239
(M n )/
....................(1)
is the average molecular weight, alpha and eta are the other two distribution parameters.
Eta is the start molecular weight and is normally estimated from
14n 6 ............................(2)
In the auto mode both factors are calculated, in user mode the values can be entered in the
edit boxes provided.
Click on Recalculate Split after the values have been entered. It should be noted that the
methodology can produce very erratic results if the values entered vary greatly from the
default calculated values. Since beta is normally inversely proportional to alpha, if alpha is
changed the user beta value should reflect this change.
Background to the Whitson method can be found in Pseudo Component Splitting 119 within the
modeling section. The shape factor alpha offers many alternative shapes to the expanded
component distribution. Each when regrouped to a number of splits will give a different value
for fluid saturation pressure pressure and separator fluid properties. The Whitson Split
Analysis 242 dialog assists the user in finding the best combination of alpha value and split
number for the fluid being matched. Click on Find Best Alpha to call this dialog.
Normal operation is to contine the distribution until the end. However, the mode combo box
allows the user to stop at a particular C plus value.
Input fields
Split Method A combo box is provided to select which method is to be used to provide
the composition distribution curve on which the final split is based.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 241
In addition the user can select between continuing the distribution to the
end on limiting it with an entered Cn+ fraction
Properties As components are extended in the range of C7 to C200 they are given
Database molecular weights and specific gravities from the selected extended
Selection properties database. The utilized database can be different for each
property, selected by the combo boxes shown above.
The database used would normally be that associated with the split
method. This automatic selection can be switched off using the check box
provided. The active database values are displayed in the Working
Values table.
properties
Property This area allows the user to control how the data base proerties are
Normalization normalized to reproduce the input SG and MWT
Available are:
Adjusting all values
Adjusting only the final value
Doing no adjustments
In addition a maximum value for SG and MWt can be set within the split
out components
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 243
Background to the Whitson method can be found in Pseudo Component Splitting 119 within the
modeling section. The shape factor alpha offers many alternative shapes to the expanded
component distribution. Each when regrouped to a number of splits will give a different value
for fluid saturation pressure and separator fluid properties. This dialog assists the user in
finding the best combination of alpha value and split number for the fluid being matched.
The procedure is as follows:
1. Enter the range of steps and alpha factors to be studied
2. Enter the PVT report data for saturation pressure and separator fluid properties
(normally GOR and oil density). Click on Copy Lab Data if the information has already
been entered as match data 267 .
Weighting can also be set for the various properties. For example, one may want to
reduce the weighting on GOR, which is usually affected by a higher measurement error
than properties like PSAT or density
3. Click on the Calculate button.
4. When all the calculations have been done the program lists the values found, the
percentage error for each test variable and the total error for that combination of alpha
factor and split number.
5. The combination with the lowest total error is highlighted at the end. If the user wishes
to use this combination or any other, click on the Select button at the beginning of the
desired row. This will return to the Advanced Splitting 233 dialog with the selections
loaded.
Input fields
Setup This panel contains the main options that will be applied to the Whitson
Pseudo-Splitting
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 245
Volume Shift
This panel allows to enable/disable the volume shift for the main stream
(Full) and for the eventual lumped stream associated (Lumped)
See also
AutoMatching of Densities and Viscosities 230
Pseudo Splitting 227
Binary Interaction Coefficients 97
Original Numbers Store 232
Automatic and Manual Mode 227
Hint on Method 230
Advanced Splitting 233
Split Profile Dialog 245
Decontamination 261
Step by Step Guide 472
This Dialog is called via the Setup Split Profile button on the Advanced Splitting Dialog.
A typical display looks like this:
Enter the composition of each component that the split routine will follow.
Only key areas should be profiled e.g. the components with maximum contamination.
The program will fill in the other components using a standard distribution.
Command buttons
Plot Plotting allows the user to see the trend in the compositions that
have been entered.
Clear This option removes all entries
Exit and Save Click on this button when happy with all the entries that have been
made. This will return the program to the Advanced Splitting display
Cancel This option clears all changes and returns the program to the
Advanced Splitting display
Copy Stream Profile If another stream within the file has a profile stored its name will
appear within the list box.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 247
The stream being acted upon can be changed via the TABS at the bottom of the composition
grid.
See PVT Project File Structure 188 for a more detailed description of streams.
The display shows the Working Composition of the selected Stream. The composition can
be viewed and manually changed if required. in common with all grids the blocks of data can
be copied to and from the clipboard with standard Control C Control V etc.
The top section of the display shows the components a, their mole percents and the
properties of each component pseudo component or group.
The corner of the properties grid gives a coloured message which indicates the status of the
composition i.e. GROUPED or MATCHED.
When a composition is grouped the components which make up each group can be found by
clicking on the component name. Click then on the down arrow which appears. As shown
below a subgrid appears containing the names of the grouped components.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 249
Z Rackett
Critical Compressibility Zc
Melting Point
Heat of Melting
Change in Volume at Melting
Molar Volume
Solubility Parameter of Liquid
Solubility Parameter of Solid
The values for pure components normally come from the selected database 189 . Mixing rules
and correlations are used for groups and pseudos. The values within the tables can be edited
on this display by clicking within a cell and entering a new number. The Edit Mole Percents
dialog should be used to change percentages of components after matching has been done .
If no matching has taken place use the Enter Composition 203 Dialog
Volume Shift S and Volume Shift C are properties used in alternative methods of calculating
Volume Shift 99 . Z Rackett is used in one method to estimate Volume Shift C .
Costald Volume and Costald Acentric Factor are used within the Costald model 116 for fluid
density.
The third section of the display shows the Binary Interaction Coefficients 216 for pairs of pure
components, groups , and pseudos. Again values can be changed within this section.
The Composition Editor 208 has much of the functionality of this dialog. In addition the user can
move,delete,change type and import components within the editor dialog.
See Control Buttons 249 for a detailed description of the button operation within this dialog.
Exit and Registers the changes made and closes down the display
Save
Cancel Shuts down the display and ignores any changes which have been made
Quick A subset of the Equation of State Calculations is available by clicking on the
Calc Quick Calc. control button within the Recombination; Enter Composition and
View Properties displays.
This feature provides the user with access to a subset of the calculation menu
as a means of checking the consistency of the entered composition
information.
Calculation modes
The small display above provides options to calculate:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 251
Calculate Maximum 388 This allows to determine the amount of water that
Water in the 388 saturates the hydrocarbon. A bigger quantity of
Hydrocarbon Phase 388 water would form a separate liquid phase
Input fields
Options The major model options are displayed. Only one set are
allowed per file.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 253
The numbers cannot be edited in this mode. However, when a different regression mode is
chosen within the Regression Match Data 274 Dialog, the display changes to reflect that the
values are now in use.
If the Global mode is selected a single value is used for all components and the display looks
like this:
In Individual mode each component can have a different value for OmegaA and OmegaB.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 255
The program will send the total composition to surface through the designated path and report
the black oil properties found. A typical display is shown below:
The GOR represents the total GOR from the fluid. The inverse is the CGR. The OIl Gravity is
the final gravity of the oil at standard conditions. The Gas Gravity is that of the accumulated
gas at surface. This calculation mimics one that is used within compositional IPM. In common
with the IPM equivalent , if no property can be calculated default values will be displayed.
The stream being viewed can be changed using the combo box provided.
Calc Changing any major option within the display ,eg. changing stream or
separator calc method, automatically triggers a recalculation of the properties.
If however, this does not happen eg. when a separator pressure is changed,
clicking on this button will recalculate the properties
More Clicking on the More button gives all the data calculated, including
compositions for the stock tank oil and the accumulated gas. This is shown
within the More Black Oil Properties Dialog
Separator The CCE input displays contain a section for Separator Data. This allows the
Data user to define a separator train through which the CCE 330 liquid will be flashed
to correct the Oil FVF and GOR. The processes which are used to return an
oil to standard conditions can significantly change the final oil characteristics
and the amount of gas liberated on the way. The stream separator settings
can be accessed via the tabs at the bottom of the table.All stages do not need
to be entered and a last flash to standard conditions is always included.The
combo within the separator data area switches between the modes available.
Flash straight to stock tank
Use Separator train 134
Use K values 138
Use Split Factors 144
The values within this separator data area are loaded and stored separately
from those within the Separator calculation.
The Copy Sep button will copy the stages from the Separator Calculation into
the Separator Data area.The Clear button removes all values from within the
Separator Data area.
For more information on K values see K Value Dialog 139
See help on the use of chillers to calculate LNG recoveries and the
background to Split factors
2.7.12.3.1 More Black Oil Properties Dialog
This option is invoked by clicking on the More option within the Black Oil Properties Dialog 254 .
The program will send the total composition to surface through the designated path and report
the black oil and the molar properties found. A typical display is shown below:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 257
The GOR represents the total GOR from the fluid. The inverse is the CGR. The Oil Gravity is
the final gravity of the oil at standard conditions. The table contains the composition of this oil
The Gas Gravity is that of the accumulated gas at surface.The table contains the composition
of this gas
This calculation mimics one that is used within compositional IPM. In common with the IPM
equivalent , if no property can be calculated default values will be displayed.
2.7.13 Grouping
This Grouping Options display can be viewed by selecting the Grouping option within the D
ata menu. A typical display would be :
When Automatic Method is selected along with the number of groups , the pure components
are sorted automatically into groups.
The number of groups required is entered in the edit box provided. The smaller the number of
groups the faster the calculation will go.
However, if too small a number is used the Equation of State may not be able to match the
more complex properties of the mixture, e.g. regression on a particular combination of
separator measurements may not find a reliable solution.
A choice of 5-6 groups seems to work for most systems. When streams are to be mixed it
may be beneficial to keep the second or injected stream separate during grouping. This can
be done be selecting an inject stream and clicking on the Injected Stream checkbox. When
a regressed stream is being grouped it is possible to say whether the regressed or basic
properties are used in the grouping via the Use Regressed Properties checkbox. Clicking
on the Group control button will initiate the grouping and bring up the View Properties display.
The Manual Method option in combination with pressing the Group control button brings up
the Manual Grouping Display.
NOTE the total group number will be the group number specified in this dialog + the number
of injected stream components.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 259
Manual Method
Selecting this option and clicking the Group button will enter the display shown below. The
top of the screen shows the groups defined so far. The bottom half contains two list boxes
one for components and another for groups. Groups are created by clicking on the desired
components , clicking on the desired group within the list box and clicking on Add Group.
Components grouped are removed from the components list box and placed in the table.
Delete Group will remove components from the selected group and place them in the
components list box. Reset Groups will delete all groups and place all components back in the
component list box. When Grouping selection are complete click on the OK button. This action
will bring up the View Properties 247 display.
Data for Reservoir Temperature, Reference Depth and Static Pressure can be entered for
each stream. The temperature is used to calculate the saturation pressure in the quick
calculation 384 dialog and to act as a starting temperature for the compositional gradient 113
calculation. The reference depth is also taken as a starting point for the compositional
gradient calculation.The static pressure at depth is used in the compositional gradient and
represents the pressure in the reservoir at which the sample has been taken. Please note that
these variables can also be changed by using the Enter Composition 203 display
The second section of this dialog allows the user to modify the standard temperature and
pressure.These variables are used throughout the PVT package to determine the volumetric
properties of the oil and gas. Some PVT reports particularly from warmer areas demand
values other than the default numbers of 0 psig and 60 degrees F. Although the differences in
FVF and GOR are not large , use of the wrong reference conditions can make matching
difficult. When the PVT file is saved the Standard conditions used are also saved with it.The
Save as Default button will store the values and use them in any new PVT file.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 261
2.7.15 Decontamination
Where data is limited and the contamination can be isolated as a single pseudo component,
the edit mole percents facility can be used. Normally a procedure like that described in the
Decontamination procedure 525 should be followed.
Mode
PVTP allows to perform decontamination in two ways:
Use Contaminant If the composition of the contaminant is available, this can be used
Composition as basis fro the decontamination of the reservoir fluid
Yes (NEW!!!)
Use Contaminant This model consists of entering directly the composition of the
Composition No uncontaminated fluid in the region of contamination. The program will
then determine the total uncontaminated fluid composition
The main table on the left hand side shows the components and the distribution of
components within the pseudo components. The colours indicate the components which are
calculated to make up each pseudo.
The distribution of the pseudo split components is determined by the path taken in
characterising the pseudo within the Pseudo Properties Dialog and the Advanced Splitting
Dialog which is accessed from it. The correct setup of this split and the matching of the
fluid must be done prior to using the decontamination feature.
The split method indicated above the table is the key to the shape of the pseudo component
distribution. This can be selected within the Advanced splitting dialog 233 .
An important split option in decontamination is to follow a profile. A profile would be
contaminant-rich part of the extended sample component distribution (C12-C20). Using this
method a profile can be created within the Split Profile Creation Dialog.
This display is entered by a stream with a fixed pseudo distribution and a set of pseudo
properties which characterises the fluid. The program splits out the composition and the main
properties used by the EoS i.e. Tc,Pc,Vc,AF, BPt and the SG.
Entering the In this mode the user can enter on the table on the right hand side the
Contaminant composition of the contaminant, its average molecular weight and the
Composition weight % of contaminant in the reservoir fluid. If available this information
can be entered in molar form and the weights calculated.
A normal procedure would be
1) Select the use contaminant composition using the yes|No combo box
2) Select the input form as weight using the combo box above the table.
3) Review the contaminant analysis data and select the range of input
required. Use the Start C and End C inputs to enter the desired range.
Click on Setup Table to resize the input grid. Note that a Cn+ line will
always be added to the range but this data does not need to be entered
if not available.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 263
Entering In this mode the user can give the program new values for the important
directly the components i.e. where the contamination was.
uncontaminated Type the new values into the New Mole % column.
fluid
composition
Function buttons
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 265
Keep existing This option creates the new decontaminated stream and
stream and overwrite replaces the existing (contaminated) one
component values
Create a new stream This option creates a new stream alongside the contaminated
with the new one. The stream name and comment can be edited at this stage
component values
Press Decontaminate to carry out the decontamination and return to the control dialog.
As part of the quick look procedure the program creates a temporary stream and does the
decontamination procedure within this stream.
This dialog allows the user to see the results of this process as a table of component
properties by clicking on View Properties.
Alternatively, the standard quick calc dialog can be called by clicking on the Quick Calc 384
button.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 267
When the decontamination screen is entered and exited , the program stores the properties of
the pseudo components at this time. These values are then taken as the reference for any
further decontamination calculations. When decontaminate is pressed within the control
display , the program looks to these values to set compositions and properties.
It is for this reason that the decontamination screen should only be activated after the
fluid is fully matched.
The top table shows these reference values. The bottom table gives the current working
pseudo component numbers. These would normally be the result of the decontamination
operation.
If, however, it was found necessary to do further work on the contaminated fluid, and the user
wishes to change the stored reference values, this display allows the user to overwrite the
archived values with the working set by clicking on the Copy button.
box provided. After supplying the data, the system individual or grouped properties can be
then be adjusted using non-linear regression techniques (using the Regression option from the
Data menu) to best fit the measurements. This combination represents a powerful technique
for adjusting the idealised equation of state to mirror the real world.
The Matching option is invoked by selecting Enter Lab Data within the Data menu.
For each match data table, enter the required information. The PVT Step by Step Guide 472
gives recommendations and examples of which data should be used.
A reference temperature is required for CCE, CVD match data. The program will prompt for
any missing information. In the CVD and DIFF sections only one temperature is required: the
program will automatically copy this information to each row. The CCE calculation can be
done at multiple temperatures.
When the Compositional Gradient table is selected, the reservoir reference conditions are
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 269
The grid tab buttons shown above allow the user to move between the match input tables.
The tabs also indicate which tables contain data. Tables with data have coloured tabs.
In the same way, the CVD is a path-dependent process, that is why it is important
to enter all the pressure steps followed in the lab
SOLIDS
Note that the grids which contain Wax Options are at the end of
the scroll bar and must be scrolled along to:
Include/Exclude Any data point or groups of points can be excluded from the regression
process. Simply highlight the desired points and press exclude. Excluded
points are indicated by a GREY text background colour. To include points
highlight again and press include. This feature can be very useful with
liquid dropouts. Enter all values, exclude all and select values as required
for inclusion
Weighting Any data point or groups of points can be given a different weighting
between high 10 and low 1.This will affect how the regression algorithm
responds to the error generated by this point. This weighting is combined
with the process weighting (high,medium,low) available within the
regression display to give an overall value. To change a weighting, select
a point or group of points, change the weighting value and press Set
Weighting. Weightings of less than 10 are indicated by the point having a
BLUE text colour
Grid Assist Sub Place the cursor anywhere in the table and press the right hand mouse
Dialog button. A small dialog will appear as shown below:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 271
Reset The Reset button causes the user to be prompted to select if the
displayed table or all matching tables should be zeroed. Note that the
cleared table or tables will not become part of the project until OK is also
selected
Plot The Plot button brings up a display of the entered data where applicable.
Clicking on OK registers any changes which may have been made and
closes down the display
Cancel Will close the display ,loosing any data which may have been entered
Notes:
Oil Viscosity can be selected as a match variable within the
CCE Table
the Oil FVF within the multi-stage Separator calculation. is
corrected through all the succeeding stages. This correction
can add up to 10 % to the un-corrected value. To activate the
correction add all stage temperatures and pressures to the
match table, even if no other matching is done within the lower
stages
To help the situation enter a target value of 180 for the Tc within the PSAT Match Data Table.
An important option to use for this type of application is the checkbox which prompts the
program to assume that the non detection of the critical point is taken as the target being
reached. This means that if the critical point disappears the temperature will be set as the
target of 180 giving an error for this calculation of zero. The disappearance of the critical point
is not uncommon with HTHP condensates.
Select the Critical temperature within the Regression Match Data dialog.
Regression produces the following beneficial result. There is no critical point and the fluid is
now a condensate.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 273
Assume the example is a gas condensate. It is fairly straightforward to match the reservoir
conditions i.e. Zgas, PSat, in isolation. This will give a model which works reliably in the match
area. However , the non-predictive nature of the EOS and its weakness towards material
balance means that this matching does not give valid results as the pressure changes rising
up the wellbore to separator conditions. Liquid dropout and Separator GOR etc. become very
suspect.
Similarly, the separator area can be well matched in isolation , but this model would not be
valid if used to predict reservoir properties.
Treating the areas separately essentially describes two different models for the same fluid.
The constant mass expansion going from well to surface cannot be resolved. The error this
approach causes can be very significant and will come out in many ways e.g. in the inability to
resolve reserves with production.
To avoid such problems we recommend that reservoir and separator matching must always
be done together Densities or density derived data must be included for reservoir and
surface to force a material balance on the system.
NOTE The EOS calculation initially calculates Zliquid and Zvapour. Densities are calculated
directly from the Zs. Matching Z matches density
See also
Step by Step Guides 472
2.7.17 Regression
This option is made available when PVT laboratory data 267 has been entered for matching.
The option is invoked by selecting Regression within the Data menu and is used to perform
the non-linear regression which adjusts the components' properties to best fit the laboratory
measured PVT data.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 275
The non-linear regression matching technique can be used on up to six PVT match tables.
1. Original: All This model makes all component Pcs, Tcs and Acentric Factors
Component available for regression. When selected this model allows the
Tcs Pcs AFs etc user to also limit the movement of the selected properties via the
checkbox which becomes visible. When invoked this option
restricts the movement of all properties such that the
progression with molecular weight remains reasonable.
Component property values can be plotted within the View
Properties Dialog. It should be noted that limiting property
movement will inevitably reduce the flexibility of the EoS method
and may decrease the accuracy of the final match with some
fluids
2. Global OmegaA, This will use one value of Omega A and B common for all
OmegaB plus components. In addition, the pseudo component and grouped
Pseudo component Tcs Pcs and AFs will be available for regression.
Tcs Pcs AFs See help on Regression with OmegaA and OmegaB 253 for more
details
3. Individual OmegaA, This will use an individual value of Omega A and B for every
OmegaB plus component. In addition, the pseudo component and grouped
Pseudo component Tcs Pcs and AFs will be available for regression.
Tcs Pcs AFs See help on Regression with OmegaA and OmegaB 253 for more
details.
The Reset Omega A and Omega B Values button that appears
with models 2 and 3 will set these values back to their default
EoS levels
4. Tcs Pcs AFs with This applies a unique multiplier parameter on all the selected
Multiplier on Each properties (Tcs, Pcs, AFs and Volume Shift, if present). The
Property (NEW!!!) objective of this option is to preserve the trend of Tcs (increasing
with carbon number) and Pcs (decreasing)
5. Tcs Pcs AFs with This applies a unique multiplier and shift parameters on all the
Shift/Multiplier on selected properties (Tcs, Pcs, AFs and Volume Shift, if present).
Each Property The objective of this option is to preserve the trend of Tcs
(NEW!!!) (increasing with carbon number) and Pcs (decreasing)
Mode
The program has two modes for Equation of State regression :
Single Stream
Multi-stream
The mode is changed by way of the radio buttons at the top of the dialog.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 277
As the name implies this mode regresses only one stream i.e. the
component properties of one stream are changed to match its Lab Data.
The stream being manipulated is selected by clicking on the tab containing
the stream name. The tab background colour is changed to BLUE if any
selections have been made for the stream 188 .
This display highlights all the variables available for regression .
Choose a variable by clicking on the checkbox alongside the name. The total
number of variables selected is shown on the left of the dialog
The variable can then be set at high, medium or low weighting in the
overall regression calculation. All selections for the selected stream can be
removed by clicking on the Clear This Stream button.
It is not necessary to select all variables, especially in cases where data
may be suspect.
The High, Medium and Low radio buttons allow the user to adjust the
weighting given to each selection. See also Lab Data Entry Dialog 267 for
more information on weightings.
When selection is complete click on the Regress control button. This action
will bring up the Regression Parameter Selection Dialog 278 .
Main closes down the dialog, saving all changes
Cancel closes down the dialog, ignoring all changes
Multi-Stream
Mode
set will be taken from the Master stream. This can be changed using the
combo box provided.
Selection is carried out in the same way as described above for a single
stream. As selections are made the Stream Summary shows the number
chosen for each stream.
Note that a maximum of 25 properties are allowed to be regressed upon.
The Clear All Streams button will set all stream selections to zero.
Stream Selections can be individually cleared by clicking on the name or
names within the Stream Summary and pressing on the Clear Selected
button.
When selection is complete click on the Regress control button.
This action will bring up the Regression Parameter Selection Dialog 278
See also:
Match Data 267
Viscosity Matching 288
Notes on Regression 295
Regression with OmegaA and OmegaB 296
ORIGINAL If not regressing on viscosity, for each group or component , the user can
MODEL select whether to regress on any or all of the following:
Critical Temperature Tc
Critical Pressure Pc
Critical Volume Vc
Acentric Factor AF
Volume Shift C or S
In addition for wax modeling 292 (if WAT or solids % have been entered in
the Lab Data 267 ) the following properties are added:
Melting Point
Heat of Melting
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 279
This display is called by the Regress Option in the Regression Match Data
dialog 274 .
For each group or component , the user can select whether to regress on
any or all of the
Our latest methodology for parameter selection is given in What Properties
to use in Regression 287 .
The matching of viscosity requires a particular procedure which is
described in Matching Viscosity 288
Limit the Movement This option will try and match the experimental
of Properties with data trying to keep the trends of the various
Respect to Each Other regressed properties
GLOBAL With this model a single value for Omega A and Omega B are applied to
OMEGA A all components. The values are displayed within the grid. A Checkbox is
AND supplied to select each parameter. Clicking on Reset at the top of the
OMEGA B column will set the respective omega parameter to the EoS default value.
MODEL In this mode the Tcs, Pcs and AFs of the pseudo and grouped
components can also be selected. In all models the volume shift
parameters and BICs are selectable See Regression with OmegaA and
OmegaB 296 .
INDIVIDUAL With this model a each component has its own value for Omega A and
OMEGA A Omega B. A Checkbox is supplied to select each parameter for every
AND component. Clicking on All at the top of the column will set on all the
OMEGA B respective omega parameters. None will switch them off. In this mode the
MODEL Tcs, Pcs and AFs of the pseudo and grouped components can also be
selected. In all models the volume shift parameters and BICs are
selectable. See Regression with OmegaA and OmegaB 296 .
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 281
TCs PCs AFs With this option each of the properties (Tc, Pc, AF) will be corrected by
WITH means of a common multiplier.
MULTIPLIER The outcome of using this mode is that the trends of various properties (for
ON EACH example, Tc increasing with carbon number) are preserved.
PROPERTY As components' thermal properties are directly calculated from Tc and Pc
using the principle of corresponding states, keeping the trend of these
properties will also hold the trend of the thermal properties themselves.
This is a benefit when the EoS is used in a process simulation tool, where
single components/cuts thermal properties are at the basis of any
calculation.
TCs PCs AFs With this option each of the properties (Tc, Pc, AF) will be corrected by
WITH SHIFT/ means of a common multiplier and shift parameter.
MULTIPLIER The outcome of using this mode is that the trends of various properties (for
ON EACH example, Tc increasing with carbon number) are preserved.
PROPERTY The Regression screen is the same as the previous figure
In the regression screens for each of the modes illustrated above common features can be
found:
Options
The Preferences Dialog 164 contains several selections which are directly or
indirectly relevant to the regression process. These options can be viewed
and/or changed by clicking on the Change button. Included in this set is
the maximum number of regression steps and the selection and de-
selection of the pure components. If pure components are switched off for
regression the display changes to:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 283
Binary Since the Binary Interaction of the lightest and heaviest components are
Interaction important , it is also possible to regress on the Binary Interaction
Coefficients Coefficient of them. For regressing on the Binary Interaction Coefficient,
there are three options available as can be seen in the figure below.
Last This will allow for performing the regression between the
Pseudo last pseudo component and the lightest components only.
Only When this option is selected, the display section will be
updated with the Name of the Last pseudo component.
All This option will apply the same value of the BIC for all the
Pseudos pseudo components with respect to the lighter components
to Same selected. for example, if there are four pseudo components
Value and the regression with respect to C1 is applied, then the
same value of the BIC will be applied to all the pseudo
components. an example is as seen in the figure below:
Please note that this option may not be suitable for all fluids,
as the requirement for a BIC is purely dependent upon the
fluid being characterised. Although the option 'ALL
PSEUDOS TO SAME VALUE' is the default option, if this
method does not provide a good match with respect to the
lab data, then the user may wish to consider using the other
options for the BIC Regression
All This option will multiply the BIC that are initially specified for
Pseudos the fluid (before starting the regression) with a constant
by Same multiplier value to get the final value of the BIC.
Multiplier Clearly, if the initial values of the BIC are zero, then
the multiplier will not have any effect for that BIC.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 285
Command buttons
The control buttons have the following functions:
Ok This option stores the values entered (in memory , not on disk) . and
closes down the display
Cancel This option shuts down the display and ignores any changes which have
been made
Regress This option starts the regression process. When complete, the Regression
Information screen is automatically displayed. See the note on regression
below
Properties This option allows to view the composition and components' properties
(see View Properties 247 )
Results This option displays a summary screen that reports the comparison
between the lab data and the EOS. See the note on regression 295 below
All On This button selects all the available component properties for regression
Clear All This button switches off all the available regression parameter options
Clear Pure This button switches off all the available regression parameter options from
see also
Mouse Shortcuts 286
Separator 286
What Properties to Use in Regression 287
Matching Viscosity 288
Regression with Solids 292
Notes on Regression 295
Regression with OmegaA and OmegaB 296
2.7.17.1.2 Separator
The Separator data option within the Regression Parameter Dialog 278 mirrors the feature
available within the individual calculation sections. The user can define a separator train
through which the oil produced within CCE 330 , GRAD 365 etc. will be flashed to correct the Oil
FVF and GOR. The processes which are used to return an oil to standard conditions can
significantly change the final oil characteristics and the amount of gas liberated on the way.
All stages do need to be entered and a last flash to standard conditions is always included.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 287
The checkbox within the separator area switches the correction on and off. Setup brings up
the small dialog where the separator conditions are defined.
All stages do not need to be entered and a last flash to standard conditions is always
included. The combo within the separator data area switches between the modes available.
Flash straight to stock tank
Use Separator train
Use K values 138
The Setup button allows the stage characteristics to be changed by calling this dialog.
The values within this separator data area are loaded and stored separately from those within
the Separator calculation. The Copy Sep button will copy the first five stages from the
Separator Calculation 358 into the Separator Data area.
The CLEAR button removes all values from within the Separator Data area.
OK will return to the calling dialog with any changes stored. Cancel will return to the calling
dialog with any changes ignored.
Create a composition with 5 or more pseudo components. Use the Whitson gamma method
within the Advanced Splitting Dialog 233 to get the best set of pseudo components. Add BICs
where practical.
Use the Preferences Dialog 164 to switch off regression with pure components. In the
Regression Parameter Dialog select all pseudo component Tcs and Pcs and any BICs that
may be available. Initially match with volume shift off.
If match is not adequate add volume shift and pseudo AFs to the match parameters. With the
restrictions placed on the match parameters it may not be possible to fully match all the
See also Step by Step Guide 472 for a detailed methodology in creating a fully matched
composition.
see also
Regression Parameter Selection 278
Regression with Solids 292
Notes on Regression 295
Regression with OmegaA and OmegaB 296
Viscosity Matching 288
1. Set up and carry out the fluid matching for all variables except viscosity e.g. PSat,PSat
density, separator GOR , Stock Tank density etc. Suggestions for the variables to use
are given in the Step by Step Guide 472 . See also What Properties to use in
Regression.
2. Enter the viscosity values to be matched to using the CCE table within the Match Data
267 Tables. Please note that there are limitations to what the LBC method can do (see
NOTE below).
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 289
3. Within the Match Selection Dialog ,click on the viscosity or viscosities to be matched.
This action will switch off all non-viscosity selections (psat etc. ). A typical display
would be:
6. Return the matching system to the selections prior to step 1 i.e. PSat etc and Tc Pc
AFs selected. Regress again .This step is not really necessary as the matching should
not be disturbed. The operation does ,however ,re-establish the selections which
made the overall match possible.
NOTE on LBC
The LBC is probably not the best compositional correlation for viscosity that we
have tested to date. It does,unfortunately, have some limitations of which the user
should be aware. The values calculated for oils ,without matching, are generally
not very good and can sometimes be wrong by an order of magnitude. This
limitation is counteracted to a great extent by the Automatching of Viscosity
feature. Unfortunately, another problem arises from the inflexibility of the
algorithm. With heavier oils it can be difficult to get a full match from reservoir
pressure to surface. If this occurs and the output is to be in the form of Black Oil
tables it may be better to match the viscosity within PROSPER or MBAL using
Black Oil correlations.
However, LBC is the standard correlation adopted in viscosity modelling for oil and
gas fluid
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 291
Unlike LBC which uses Vcs, the other viscosity models use Tcs,Pcs and liquid densities to
calculate viscosity. Matching directly on these properties would destroy the match to the main
fluid properties such as saturation pressure and separator GOR. As an alternative, these
models have been given a shift and multiplier mechanism to improve the match.
1. Set up and carry out the fluid matching for all variables except viscosity e.g. PSat,
PSat density, separator GOR , Stock Tank density etc. Suggestions for the variables
to use are given in the Step by Step Guide 472 . See also What Properties to use in
Regression.
2. Enter the viscosity values to be matched to using the CCE table within the Match Data
Tables.
3. Within the Match Selection Dialog ,click on the viscosity or viscosities to be matched.
This action will switch off all non-viscosity selections (psat etc. ). A typical display
would be:
5. Click on Regress to match viscosity. The shift and multiplier parameters are
displayed. Gas and Oil values are matched separately. The Reset Params button
can be used to undo any matching that has taken place.
6. Return the matching system to the selections prior to step 1 i.e. PSat etc and Tc Pc
AFs selected. Regress again .This step is not really necessary as the matching should
not be disturbed. The operation does ,however ,re-establish the selections which
made the overall match possible.
see also
Regression Parameter Selection 278
What Properties to Use in Regression 287
Regression with Solids 292
Notes on Regression 295
Regression with OmegaA and OmegaB 296
2.7.17.4 Regression With Solids
In the Equation of State model ,viscosity is calculated by the method of Lohrenz, Bray and
Clark (LBC).
This display is called by the Regress Option in the Regression Match Data dialog. if a Solid
option has been entered in the Match Data Tables.
The possible entries include Wax Appearance Temperature and Amount of Wax.
If either of these option is chosen the display expands to include two further columns as
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 293
shown below:
From the expressions within Wax modeling and Wax Model Details it can be seen that the
important variables as far as solid formation are concerned are Melting Point and Heat of
Melting.
Since a component is only allowed into the solid if its melting point is greater than the test
temperature only the heaviest components have any effect.
Melting Point is the key variable and it should be used first.
Heat of Melting has little effect on Wax Appearance Temperature but it significantly changes
the percentage of wax produced.
The lack of significant properties to change and the inflexibility of the underlying correlations
may mean that the model cannot fully match the variability found in complex wax forming
fluids.
NOTE: From the models it is obvious that the other component properties used in regression
i.e. Tc,Pc,AF etc. do not significantly influence solid formation. Their effect comes in the
composition and fugacity of the liquid solvent. It is therefore possible to match solid formation
in isolation from the other match points e.g. PSAT in a similar way to that proposed for
matching viscosities.
1. Set up and carry out the fluid matching for all variables except solids e.g. PSat,PSat
density, separator GOR , Stock Tank density etc. Suggestions for the variables to use
are given in the Step by Step Guide 472 . See also What Properties to use in Regression.
2. Enter the Wax values to be matched to using the WAT and %Solids tables within the
Match Data Tables.
3. Within the Match Selection Dialog, switch off all selections (psat etc. ) except solids.
4. Click on Regress to bring up the Parameter Selection Dialog . Use the Clear All button
to remove the Tc,Pc AF etc. Selections. Select the component Melting Points and if
necessary Heats of Melting (as above)
6. Return the matching system to the selections prior to step 1 i.e. PSat etc and Tc Pc
AFs selected. Regress again .This step is not really necessary as the matching should
not be disturbed. The operation does, however, re-establish the selections which made
the overall match possible.
Note:
If a different wax model is to be selected, then it is possible to change the model by
accessing the Change button in the Regression screen and selecting the desired was
calculation option:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 295
See Wax modeling 100 for more details on the model types available.
If the calculation completes due to the number of regression cycles and a satisfactory error
has not been achieved , it is possible to regress again with the composition set at the
regressed value.
NOTE 4 If no satisfactory regression can be achieved the problem may be within the
following:
1) Incorrect or incompatible data entered for lab matching
2) Too few groups used to give the system flexibility to match see
Grouping
3) Composition setup particularly of pseudos not adequate for matching
The regression may succeed if a different path is taken to the solution e.g.
by
1) Taking each calculation consecutively i.e. regressing on one calculation
then using the regressed values as input to the next. A reasonable order
is Psat, followed by CCE then Separator etc.
2) Selecting a different BI Coefficient correlation or entering new values
manually. Most calculations are very dependent on the value of coefficient
between the lightest and heaviest components.
3) Taking care to match the Pseudo properties to the best lab
measurement available.
4) Selecting a different set of properties to regress e.g. density is
sensitive to Pc,Tc values while viscosity(see CCE matching) is almost
totally dependent on Vc.
5) Increasing the number of groups or ungrouping completely as this
gives the calculation more flexibility
see also
Regression Parameter Selection 278
What Properties to Use in Regression 287
Regression with Solids 292
Notes on Regression 295
Regression with OmegaA and OmegaB 296
2.7.17.6 Regression with OmegaA and OmegaB
Selection of this method is done within the Regression Dialog 274 .
Within the 2 most common Equations of State 91 i.e.. Peng Robinson and Soave Redlich
Kwong OmegaA and OmegaB are empirically derived constants .
How these variables fit into the overall equation is given in the help on Acentric Factors.
In the Peng Robinson(PR) equation the a(T) function at the critical point is given by the
empirical relationship
R 2TC2
a (Tc ) 0.45724 ( )
PC
The constant 0.45724 is the OmegaA parameter.
In addition the repulsive factor b within PR is given by:
RT C
b 0.0778 ( )
PC
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 297
A methodology has developed within the industry to treat OmegaA and B as variables for use
within the matching process.
This is really an alternative to using individual components Tc and Pc properties.
One advantage of this approach is that it leaves measured properties such as the Tc and Pc
of methane untouched while giving additional parameters to match with.
This methodology is particularly important if a corresponding states model for viscosity or
thermal conductivity is to be calculated.
One problem which may arise with going this route for regression is passing the match on to
other programs (like Hysys or Unisim process simulators).
In addition, with some fluids this approach will not give as complete a match as using
individual Tcs and Pcs.
There are 2 versions of the OmegaA and OmegaB match available within the program:
Global the same value for OmegaA and OmegaB are used for all components and
Individual each component can have a different value for OmegaA and OmegaB
The regression model is chosen within the Regression Dialog 274 using the list box provided:
Selecting mode 2 or 3 will change the options within the Regression Parameter Selection
Dialog 278 and also within the View Properties Dialog.
see also
Regression Parameter Selection 278
What Properties to Use in Regression 287
Regression with Solids 292
Notes on Regression 295
The table allows the user to configure up to 100 points. Entries are defined by setting up a
calculation and column name for each or a group of points. If the point matches the variables
and range of a calculated plot the Test Points will be drawn in the same way as match data is
done.The points can be defined in any pattern and ordered using the Sort Table option. The
table is automatically sorted when this dialog is first displayed.
2) Once selected the rows can be setup, cleared or the data only erased.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 299
3) When the rows have been selected ,choose a calculation and a pair of variables. The
click on the Setup Rows button .
The program will setup the calculation type , X and Y variable names and units within the
grid.
5) Click on Exit and Save when all selections have been made
Display of the test points can be toggled on and off with the Show Test Points on Plot
checkbox.
Clear Rows This option removes any definitions or data within a selected area
This option removes data within a selected area but leaves the calculation
Clear Row and variable definitions intact
Data
Clear All This option removes all definitions and data from the table
Exit and Save This option closes down the dialog with all the changes saved
This option closes down the dialog with all the changes abandoned
Cancel
If any test points are detected which match a Plots variables and range they are automatically
plotted as shown below.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 301
2.8 Lumping/Delumping
NEW!!!
As described in the Technical Overview 7 , the Lumping/Delumping feature provides with a
unique methodology to:
Determine a pair of EOS models, one with a large number of components (called
"Full" or "Delumped" further below) and the other with a small number of components
(called "Lumped"), equivalent to each other
Determine the logic followed to create the pair - the Lumping Rule. The Lumping
Rule describes the correspondence between the Full and the Lumped compositions
and is used to pass from the Full composition to the Lumped or viceversa
QC the pair Full/Lumped compositions and export them to IPM as .PRP file
Creating The starting point is an EOS that has been matched to a PVT lab report.
the Lumped This initial EOS represents the "Full" composition as it has been matched
from the Full using as large as necessary a number of components. For example, if
composition the EOS is to be used in a process simulator, a large number of
components can be chosen (for example 20 or more).
The process of creation of a "Lumped" composition consists of defining
the various groups of components manually or recalling an existing
grouping of an existing Lumping Rule. In the first case (manual Lumping)
a Lumping Rule is created, which contains the logic followed to create
the lumping. In the other two cases, the Lumping rule comes from an
already existing grouped composition or from an already existing Lumping
Rule.
When creating the Lumping Rule the program makes sure that the
most important PVT properties (saturation pressure, GOR and
density at surface) in the Full and Lumped compositions are
consistent with each other
Quality This can be achieved by running all the most common calculations and
checking the comparing important parameters like CCE Oil FVF and density, CVD
pair Full/ liquid dropout, etc. obtained with both the Full and the Lumped
Lumped are compositions
consistent to
each other
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 303
Command buttons
View... This allows to view the compositions and their properties. If a pair Full/
Lumped compositions are available, it is possible to view the two. Refer to
the View Properties topic 247 for further details
Quick Calc This calls a series of calculations (phase envelope, PSAT, flash to
Standard, etc.) that can be used to QC (ref. Quick Calc topic 384 ). When a
pair Full/Lumped compositions are available, each calculation is performed
for each composition
Stream At the top of the section there is the list of all the streams included in the
Lumping PVT file along with information about if a Lumped composition is available
for each stream, the number of lumps and the methodology followed
(Manual, From Rule or From Group), if certain components are held and
the Rule Tag identifying the rule followed for the lumping.
In the centre-left part of the there are the main options to define the
method used for the Lumping/Delumping:
PSAT, GOR These are results fields and are used to quickly verify that the Full and
Lumped compositions give similar results. The Reservoir Temperature entry
determines the temperature at which the PSAT is calculated
Volume Shift These options allow to enable/disable the volume shift independently for the
Full and Lumped compositions
Target GOR The Target GOR is used as part of the Lumping/Delumping to make sure
Method that the Lumped composition reproduces the same GOR as the Full
composition. The drop-down menu allows to select the sources of gas and
liquid used to recombine the fluid to a target GOR (ref. Target GOR 416
section)
Lumping This menu allows to select the methodology used for the Lumping:
Method
Manual The user defines the various components lumps and creates
Lumping the Lumping Rule used for the lumping
Lump from If an existing grouped composition 257 is available, it is
Group possible to create a new lump based on the same logic
present in the grouped composition
Lump from If an Lumping Rule is already available, or if one has been
Rule defined manually and is present in the model, this can be
used to lump and existing Full composition
Separator Data The separator train conditions are used to determine properties like GOR
and oil density at Standard Conditions. The options available are the same
as see in the various calculation screens (for example, in the CCE
calculation 333 )
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 305
Stream In the centre-right part of the section, other options are available, which
Lump/Import/ allow to enable further options, create, import/export compositions and
Export Lumping Rules.
More This button allows to define the Lumping Method and which properties to
Setup match:
Lumping Same as seen above 304 . This option allows to specify how
Method to perform the lumping, if manually defining the lumps, or
using an existing group, or using an existing Lumping Rule
Active Rule This allows to select the Lumping Rule used for the Lumping
Match with This enables/disables the matching of the GOR when
Target GOR creating a lumped composition. The option will make sure
that the lumped composition reproduces the same GOR and
the Full compositionand to achieve that it will recombine the
Lumped composition to the GOR of the Full composition
Match with This enables/disables the matching of the Saturation
PSAT Pressure when creating a lumped composition. The
matching of the PSAT is achieved by applying a BI
coefficient multiplier to the BI coefficients of the Lumped
composition to match the PSAT of the Full composition
Hold Amount If single components are present (for example: CO2 alone),
Lump This button allows to create the Lumped composition based on the Full one.
Stream Depending on the Lumping Method 304 selected the Lump Stream button
operates in different ways:
If Manual Lumping is selected, the Manual Lumping section is accessed
If Lump from Rule is selected, the lumped composition is created
directly using the Lumping Rule
Import Group If a grouped composition is available in the model (created with the
Grouping feature of fro Lumping/Delumping itself by exporting To Group), it
is possible to apply the grouped composition embedded rule to the main
composition (see the example below 317 )
Clear Lumping This option eliminates the Lumped composition of the selected stream (the
selected stream is in cyan colour)
Export..prp This option exports the Full and Lumped compositions to .PRP file, which
can then be used to import the compositions in the IPM Suite
To Stream This option exports the Full and Lumped compositions to a new stream
within PVTP
To Group This option exports the Lumped composition only to a stream in PVTP. This
stream, of course, is going to be a Grouped stream
Lumping Rules This button leads to the section where the Lumping Rules are present, can
be defined or edited. See further 312 below for a more detailed description
Active Rule As see above, this allows to select the Lumping Rule used for the Lumping
Important Note:
When the options Match with GOR, PSAT and Hold Amount of Single Components are
enabled, the program will try and honour all of them at the same time.
However, it is important to note that in many cases it is not possible to physically
respect all of them at the same time.
For example, if a single component is to be held and at the same time the GOR of the
Lumped is to be matched to the Full composition GOR, the program will have to iterate
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 307
by setting the single component composition the same as the Full composition,
recombine the fluid to Target GOR to match the GOR, then re-set the single
component composition again same as the Full, recombe with Target GOR until the
GOR is honoured and the single component composition is kept the same. In many
cases it is not possible to achieve the matching of the GOR keeping the same mole
fraction.
That is why a hierarchy has been established in respecting the properties:
the Hold Amount is honoured first,
then the GOR second
then the PSAT third
This is because matching of the PSAT is relatively easy by manipulating opportunely
the EOS. Hold Amount is first in the
In any case, it is important to note that the user has full control about which options can
be selected, as well as any manual adjustments can be performed to achieve the most
suitable matching
2.8.2 Manual Lumping
The Manual Lumping has the objective of creating the Lumped composition from the Full by
manually specifying the various lumps, generating in this way a Lumping Rule.
The Manual Lumping is performed in the same way as the manual grouping (see above 259 ):
Select the components from the list on the bottom right, select the Lump and Add lump, as
shown below:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 309
Then Lump:
After saying Yes, it will be possible to see that a Lumped composition has been created and
a Lumping Rule has been created (PVT1 in the example below)
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 311
Clicking on View at the to of the screen it is possible to visualise the two compositions:
To switch from one composition to the other use the toggle on the top-right of the panel.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 313
Add Rule This option adds a new empty Lumping Rule, which can be modified by the
user as necessary
Delete Rule This option enters a Delete mode that allows to delete rules as required:
Export / These options allow to export/import Lumping Rules using an ASCII file with
Import Rule extension .pxlrule . This allows to transfer Lumping Rules from one PVTP
model to another
List of The list of the Lumping Rules describes the various rules present in the
Lumping PVTP file.
Rules
Tag Name used in the program to identify a Lumping Rule
Number of Number of components used in the Lumped
Lumps composition
Last Edited Each rule is also identified by a date
Description This is an editable label that the user can enter to give
more information about the Lumping Rule. When
creating a Lumping Rule using the Manual Lumping, the
program will enter a default label ("Created from
lumping of ...pvi) that can be modified at will
Select See further 314
2.8.3.1 Select
This option allows to view the details of each Lumping Rule, create a rule manually or edit an
existing one.
The Lumping Rules Summary Dialog contains the logic followed in creating the each lump
from the Full composition:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 315
For example, in the figure above the lump N2C1 has been lumped by grouping together
components whose name are N2 and C1. Therefore the lumping is done in this case "by
Name". In the Description these is the correspondence.
Set up
Next and These buttons allow to pass from one lump to the following/previous
Previous
Lump and Order number and name of the lump
Lump Label
Lumping Mode This drop-down menu allows to define how the components are lumped.
Several option are available, which allow to lump components according to
different methodologies (by name, molecular weight, etc.)
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 317
The main composition Example 1 is selected (in cyan in the figure below). A grouped
composition "Grouped" is also present:
In the main dialog it is now possible to see that a Lumped composition has been created:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 319
Where applicable, the last set of entries for each calculation are saved with the other data in
the PVT project file.
Method III. Provides the user with access to a subset of the calculation menu as a means of
checking the consistency of the entered composition information. The Quick Calc 384 display
provides options to calculate:
Phase Envelope
Critical Point (Temperature and Pressure)
Saturation Pressure (at the reference temperature)
Flash to Standard conditions
Flash Through Separator Stages
Maximum water in Hydrocarbon Phase
All calculation results are retained for inclusion in the Reports 437 available with the PVT
package.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 321
A critical point calculation can be initiated by selecting the Critical Point option from the
calculation menu or clicking on the icon shown above. Alternatively, the Critical Point within the
Quick Calc 384 dialog can be used.
The result of the calculation is in a message box as shown below.
In addition indication is given of the kind of system at reference conditions i.e. Dew Point
(gas) or Bubble Point (liquid)
It should be noted that the Critical Point may not always be resolvable for complex mixtures.
If this proves to be the case try adjusting the values of Binary Interaction Coefficient, Acentric
Factor of the heaviest components and the properties of any pseudo components which have
been defined. Remember that the equation of state is not predictive, if a match point is
available; always use this to guide the changes.
A Phase Envelope calculation can be initiated by selecting the Phase Envelope option from
the calculation menu or clicking on the icon shown above. Alternatively,the Phase Envelope
option within the Quick Calc 384 dialog can be used.
The display below shows an example of the phase envelope input parameters screen. As the
display loads it automatically calculates the phase envelope for vapour fraction 1.0. and the
currently active stream.
Stream The list box allows the user to select any combination of streams to
Selection calculate
Additional
Calculations
(Solids)
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 323
Auto the entry boxes are loaded with values of 0.5, 0.6, 0.7,
0.8, 0.9, and 1.0
Manual entry Eight entry boxes are provided for entering vapour
fractions from 0.1 to 1.0.
The Clear button will remove all entries in Manual Entry
mode
Calculation Entry boxes are provided to change the following values used to limit the
Options/Limits phase envelope calculation:
Pressure dictates the gap between pressure movements used
Step to detect phase envelope
Min Pressure sets the bottom limit of the calculation
Max. Pressure sets the upper limit of the calculation
Integration dictates the size of movement of the Integration
Step function
Max. dictates the maximum size of movement of the
Integration Integration function
Step
Plot Area This shows the shape of the phase envelope calculated. No adjustments
are available for this plot. However, the graph can be enlarged and then
manipulated by using the Expand Plot button
Status Area This shows the critical points calculated during the phase envelope
calculation and also includes a status message area which indicates the
progress of any calculations. Note that the Critical Pressure Pc, Critical
Temperature Tc ,Cricondenbar ,Cricondentherm etc. may not always be
resolved for complex systems
Command buttons
Included in this area are a series of control button which have the following functions:
Exit This option stores the values entered (in memory , not on disk) and
closes down the display
Calc This option recalculates the phase envelope(s) using the latest inputs
Expand Plot This option brings up a full-sized plot of the phase envelope
Set Test Points This option calls the Phase Envelope Test Points 324 display. This allows
the user to enter ten values for Saturation Pressure versus Temperature.
The values will be displayed on the Phase Envelope plot as Match Point
crosses
Clipboard
This option brings up the selection dialog above. Any result and entered
profile data can be transferred to the clipboard
Results This option brings up the Phase Envelope Results 327 dialog
Use of Streams
The option of calculating multiple curves is a very powerful aid in the analysis of
petroleum mixtures. Since streams can be filled with varying compositions changes in
fluid characteristics can be visualized. For example the program can illustrate how a
fluid changes as a result of a compositional gradient. Stream 1 and 2 can contain the
compositions of gas and oil calculated before and after the gas cap has been
detected. The phase envelopes are very different but they intersect at the gas cap
temperature and pressure.
The compositions are transferred into the stream via the calculation analysis display.
Since the stream can also contain compositions from other PVT files (using Import or
Add Stream 413 ),compositions from multiple fluid samples can be viewed side by side
Note
Phase envelope calculations are complex and may take some time. If the plot does
not match expectations or is unresolved try adjusting the values of Binary Interaction
Coefficient between C1 and the heaviest component , Acentric Factor of the heaviest
components and the properties of any pseudo components which have been defined
This dialog is called by clicking on the Set Test Pts. button within the Phase Envelope
Calculation 321 dialog.
Saturation
Points
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 325
This display is called by pressing the Set Test Pts. command button on
the Phase Envelope 321 control screen or on the expanded Phase
Envelope plot.This screen allows the user to enter ten values for
Saturation Pressure versus Temperature for each Stream (see PVT
Project File Structure 188 ) The active stream can be changed using the
stream combo box. The values will be displayed on the Phase Envelope
plot as Match Point crosses using the Match Point colour. The drawing
of test points can be switched on and off by using the combo box
provided. The Copy Lab Data button will transfer any Lab Data
Saturation Pressure values into the table.
Clear removes any entered values
PT Profile Points
If displayed the points in the danger area for wax or hydrate formation
will change colour.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 327
The colours used can be changed with the Colour selection dialog.
2.9.2.2 Phase Envelope Results Dialog
This dialog is called by clicking on the results button within the Phase Envelope Calculation 321
Dialog.
The user can view all the stream phase envelope data by scrolling down the tables and
moving between the tables by way of the stream tabs.If the Hydrate Formation Pressure 405
has been selected for calculation the values found will also be displayed.
The results can be copied to the Clipboard or to another package such as EXCEL by
highlighting the values required and pressing Ctrl + C.Ctrl + V will insert the values into the
target program.
A Saturation Pressure calculation can be initiated by selecting the Saturation Pressure option
from the calculation menu or clicking on the icon shown above. This dialog is used for
Automatic and User Selected Input .
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 329
The user selected version replaces the ranged input with a series of entry boxes which can be
used to enter any temperature.
Stream
The list box allows the user to select any combination of streams to
calculate. See PVT Project File Structure 188 for more information on
streams.
This display contains radio buttons which allow the user to swap
between User Selected and Automatic modes.
In addition, data entry boxes are provided for entering the limits of the
temperature and pressure ranges to be covered and the number of
points to be calculated for each variable. The points will be spread
evenly throughout the temperature and pressure ranges selected. All
boxes should have an entry before proceeding to the Calculation Dialog
409
Calc To bring up the calculation dialog click on the Calc control button
Cancel Cancel will clear all entries and return the user to the Summary Screen
Clear Clear removes any entered values
Options
The major model options are displayed.Only one set are allowed per
file. Clicking on the Change button calls the Preferences Dialog 157 .
A CCE calculation can be initiated by selecting the Constant Composition Expansion option
from the calculation menu or clicking on the icon shown above.
Constant Composition Expansion is a flash process where all the products are retained i.e.
the total amount of each component at the initial conditions is the same at all the measured
values, only the phase splits (K values ) change as part of the calculation.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 331
The calculation input screen comes in two forms viz. Automatic and User Selected Entry, as
shown in the two figures below:
In the User Selected version the ranged input is replaced by a grid where any mixture of
pressures and temperatures can be entered
Input fields
These are the options available:
Data Points This option defines how the ranges of temperature and pressures are
entered in the CCE calculation. Two modes are available:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 333
Streams
The list box allows the user to select any combination of streams to
calculate. See PVT Project File Structure 188 for more information on
streams
Options The major model options are displayed. Only one set are allowed per
file.
The CCE input display contains a section for Separator Data. This
allows the user to define a separator train through which the oil or gas
will be flashed to correct the Oil FVF, GOR and CGR. The processes
which are used to return an oil to standard conditions can significantly
change the final oil characteristics and the amount of gas liberated on
the way. When multiple samples are being analysed, it may be
necessary to have individual separator settings for each stream. In this
case, the individual radio button should be clicked on. The stream
separator settings can be accessed via the tabs at the bottom of the
table. All stages do not need to be entered and a last flash to standard
conditions is always included. The combo within the separator data area
switches between the modes available.
Flash straight to stock tank
Use Separator train
Use K values
Use Split Factors
The values within this separator data area are loaded and stored
separately from those within the Separator calculation.
The Copy Sep button will copy the stages from the Separator
Calculation into the Separator Data area. The Clear button removes all
values from within the Separator Data area.
For more information on K values see K Value 138 help
See more details on the use of chillers to calculate LNG recoveries and
the background to Split factors in Separator Calculations and the Path
to Surface 134
Command buttons
Calc Brings up the calculation dialog click on the Calc control button.
Cancel Cancel will clear all entries and return the user to the Summary Screen
Clear Clear removes any entered values
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 335
The Calculation Screen is loaded when the Calculate button is pressed on an Automatic or
User Selected Input Dialog.
The display is in the form of a table with input values on the left and the required calculation
variables listed in columns on the right.
If multiple streams have been selected (see Constant Composition Expansion), the user can
move between the streams by clicking on the tabs at the bottom of the display. (See PVT
Project File Structure 188 for more information on streams).
Each column has a variable name and unit as a heading.
Scroll bars are provided to show more variables and results.
Colours have been used with grids to indicate phase:
If the values have been already calculated the display will show the last set of values
calculated.
Command buttons
The display has several control buttons along the top which have the following functions:
Calc This option recalculates the table using the latest inputs provided
Plot This generates a full sized plot of the calculated results
Layout This option allows the user to select which columns are displayed in the
results table. See Calculation Layout display
Analysis This option produces a secondary screen giving the compositions
Note on Density
The Calculation table provides 2 alternative values for Oil Density i.e. EOS and
one from a correlation (Standing/Katz or Costald). The EOS value derives
strictly from the Equation of State value for Compressibility z and PV=zRT while
the other stems from the composition being input into a Standing-Katz or
Costald density correlation. The values in combination can be used as a guide
to the appropriateness of the values used to generate the EOS model e.g. BI
coefficients, acentric factors, pseudo characterization etc.The EOS density is
used in all subsequent calculations for FVF, GOR etc.
The screen shows the compositions and calculated K values for each temperature and
pressure combination. For CCE, the separator compositions represent the result of taking
the total composition through the separator/chiller combination.
Alternatively K values 138 or Split Factors 135 may have been used to replace the separator
system. In addition the recoveries of the three exiting fluids are displayed. If the dialog is
called by a CVD experiment the gas evolved in the experiment is sent through the separators.
Similarly with an oil CVD the produced oil acts as the feed for the separators
In addition, intermediate compositions can be extracted for further work as separate files or
streams.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 337
The stream being viewed can be changed using the combo box provided.
The temperature value displayed can be changed by clicking on the down or up arrow within
the temperature area ( top left). The pressure value displayed can be changed by clicking on
the down or up arrow within the pressure area ( top right).
Exit Close down the display and return to the calculation screen
Clipboard This sends all or part of the analysis data to the clipboard by calling the
Copy to Clipboard 340 Dialog
Extract This option allows the user to save the composition (total, vapour or liquid)
being stored as a separate PVT file (To File) for later retrieval.
Alternatively, a stream can be created within the current PVT Project File
(To Stream). The analysis display for a separator calculation is more
complex
Quality Clicking on the Quality Button will automatically generate a quality plot of
Plot the type shown below. Background to this plot is described in the utility
menu help for the Hoffmann Quality Plot. If the properties of the
components give a consistent flash, the light components should roughly fall
along a straight line.
The Layout screen allows to select which variables to report in the calculation.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 339
Command buttons
Calculation This dialog is called by clicking on the Clipboard button within the
Results Calculation Results 334 Dialog.
Among the option available are to include the results column names and/or
units. In addition the order of the results within the table can be reversed.
To send the data to the clipboard, click on OK
Calculation This dialog is called by clicking on the Clipboard button within the
Analysis Calculation Analysis 336 Dialog.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 341
Among the option available are to include the analysis column names. All
the analysis created within the calculation on the target stream can be sent
to the clipboard by clicking on option 2.The last option indicates whether
data other than the compositions should be sent
A CVD calculation can be initiated by selecting the Constant Volume Depletion option from the
calculation menu or clicking on the icon shown above.
Constant Volume Depletion is an isothermal flash process where the volume of the system is
kept equal to the volume at Dew Point. At each flash stage volume in excess of this is
removed as excess gas. The excess gas products, i.e. equal to the increase in volume over
the initial value, are removed at each stage to become the wellstream production.
The liquid and gas equal to the initial volume goes on to be flashed at the next set of
conditions.
The CVD calculation concentrates on the gas and liquid left in the reservoir, while the
Depletion Study 348 is used to find the produced gas (Wellstream) data. For example, the GOR
displayed for the CVD is that of the oil within the reservoir.
The CVD screen has a manual mode and automatic mode. The normal mode is User Selected
as PVT reports only have a small number of steps. The Automatic mode allows the user to
introduce a larger number of small steps. This better represents the calculation path of a
program like MBAL.
Data points
User The user can manually enter the temperature and pressure steps for
Selected Mode the depletion
Automatic The pressure range can be generated by entering the maximum and
Mode minimum values and the number of steps
Input fields
Stream
The list box allows the user to select any combination of streams to
calculate. See PVT Project File Structure 188 for more information on
streams
Options
The major model options are displayed. Only one set are allowed per
file.
Clicking on the Change Button calls the File|Preferences 156 Dialog
Recycling
Produced Gas
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 343
Separator Data The CVD input display contains a section for Separator Data.
This allows the user to define a separator train through which the oil or
gas will be flashed to correct the Oil FVF, GOR and CGR. The
processes which are used to return an oil to standard conditions can
significantly change the final oil characteristics and the amount of gas
liberated on the way. When multiple samples are being analysed, it
may be necessary to have individual separator settings for each
stream. In this case, the individual radio button should be clicked on.
The stream separator settings can be accessed via the tabs at the
bottom of the table. All stages do not need to be entered and a last
flash to standard conditions is always included. The combo within the
separator data area switches between the modes available.
Flash straight to stock tank
Use Separator train
Use K values
Use Split Factors
The values within this separator data area are loaded and stored
separately from those within the Separator calculation.
The Copy Sep button will copy the stages from the Separator
Calculation into the Separator Data area. The Clear button removes all
values from within the Separator Data area.
For more information on K values see K Value 138 help
See more details on the use of chillers to calculate LNG recoveries and
the background to Split factors in Separator Calculations and the Path
to Surface 134
Command buttons
Calc Brings up the calculation dialog click on the Calc control button.
Cancel Cancel will clear all entries and return the user to the Summary Screen
Clear Clear removes any entered values
An OIL CVD calculation can be initiated by selecting the Constant Volume Oil Depletion option
from the calculation.
This is a similar process to the Constant Volume Depletion 341 . The difference is that the
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 345
produced fluid is the oil from the reservoir. As in the CVD this is a flash process where the
volume of the system at Bubble Point is preserved. At each flash stage volume in excess of
this is removed as excess oil. The excess oil products, i.e. equal to the increase in volume
over the initial value, are removed at each stage to become the production. The liquid and gas
equal to the initial volume goes on to be flashed at the next set of conditions.This process is
analogous to that in the depletion of many oil reservoirs and as such the results calculated can
be a useful precursor to the production of a more advanced model.
As with the gas CVD, this version has a manual and an automatic mode. The automatic mode
is shown below:
Data points
User The user can manually enter the temperature and pressure steps for
Input fields
Stream
The list box allows the user to select any combination of streams to
calculate. See PVT Project File Structure 188 for more information on
streams
Options
The major model options are displayed. Only one set are allowed per
file.
Clicking on the Change Button calls the File|Preferences 156 Dialog
Recycling
Produced Gas
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 347
This allows the user to define a separator train through which the oil or
gas will be flashed to correct the Oil FVF, GOR and CGR. The
processes which are used to return an oil to standard conditions can
significantly change the final oil characteristics and the amount of gas
liberated on the way. When multiple samples are being analysed, it
may be necessary to have individual separator settings for each
stream. In this case, the individual radio button should be clicked on.
The stream separator settings can be accessed via the tabs at the
bottom of the table. All stages do not need to be entered and a last
flash to standard conditions is always included. The combo within the
separator data area switches between the modes available.
Flash straight to stock tank
Use Separator train
Use K values
Use Split Factors
The values within this separator data area are loaded and stored
separately from those within the Separator calculation.
The Copy Sep button will copy the stages from the Separator
Calculation into the Separator Data area. The Clear button removes all
values from within the Separator Data area.
For more information on K values see K Value 138 help
See more details on the use of chillers to calculate LNG recoveries and
the background to Split factors in Separator Calculations and the Path
to Surface 134
This calculation also allows the user to gauge the effect of recycling all or part of the
separator gas back into the reservoir.
All other options are the same as those described for the normal gas CVD 341 .
Command buttons
Calc Brings up the calculation dialog click on the Calc control button.
Cancel Cancel will clear all entries and return the user to the Summary Screen
Clear Clear removes any entered values
A DEPL calculation can be initiated by selecting the Depletion Study option from the
calculation menu or clicking on the icon shown above. The Depletion Study is similar to a
Constant Volume Depletion 341 . The process is the same. The difference between them lies in
the emphasis of the calculations undertaken.
A Depletion Study is used where the main product is the gas removed at each stage. The
calculations are designed to provide an insight into the Wellstream properties and composition
as the reservoir depletes.
The Depletion Study is a flash process where the volume target is kept constant throughout
the stages. The excess gas products, i.e. equal to the increase in volume over the initial value,
are removed at each stage to become the wellstream production.The composition, produced
mole % and Surface GOR of this wellstream gas are reported. The produced mole %
reported in this instance refers to the produced dry gas recovered.
In addition a Cumulative Production figure is worked out from the Gas in Place value which is
input by the user.
The liquid and gas equal to the initial volume goes on to be flashed at the next set of
conditions. A Reservoir Liquid Dropout is also reported.
The DEPL screen has only a manual mode as shown below.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 349
Entries are provided for the temperature at which the process is to be carried out and the
pressure stages involved in the operation.
Data points
User The user can manually enter the temperature and pressure steps for
Selected Mode the depletion
Automatic The pressure range can be generated by entering the maximum and
Mode minimum values and the number of steps
Input fields
Stream
The list box allows the user to select any combination of streams to
calculate. See PVT Project File Structure 188 for more information on
streams
Options
The major model options are displayed. Only one set are allowed per
file.
Clicking on the Change Button calls the File|Preferences 156 Dialog
Separator Data The Depletion input display contains a section for Separator Data.
This allows the user to define a separator train through which the oil or
gas will be flashed to correct the Oil FVF, GOR and CGR. The
processes which are used to return an oil to standard conditions can
significantly change the final oil characteristics and the amount of gas
liberated on the way. When multiple samples are being analysed, it
may be necessary to have individual separator settings for each
stream. In this case, the individual radio button should be clicked on.
The stream separator settings can be accessed via the tabs at the
bottom of the table. All stages do not need to be entered and a last
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 351
Command buttons
Calc Brings up the calculation dialog click on the Calc control button.
Cancel Cancel will clear all entries and return the user to the Summary Screen
Clear Clear removes any entered values
Control+V
A DIFF calculation can be initiated by selecting the Differential Expansion option from the
calculation menu or clicking on the icon shown above.
Differential Expansion or Liberation is an isothermal flash process where all the gas products
are removed at each stage. The liquid goes on to be flashed at the next set of conditions.The
Differential Liberation screen has only a Manual Method, a typical display being shown below.
Entries are provided for the temperature at which the process is to be carried out and the
pressure stages involved in the operation. A Clear button removes all entries.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 353
Data points
User The user can manually enter the temperature and pressure steps for
Selected Mode the differential liberation
Input fields
Stream
The list box allows the user to select any combination of streams to
calculate. See PVT Project File Structure 188 for more information on
streams
Options
The major model options are displayed. Only one set are allowed per
file.
Clicking on the Change Button calls the File|Preferences 156 Dialog
Copy from CVD The Copy from CVD button copies across the entries which have been
made for the Constant Volume Depletion 341 calculation.
Command buttons
Calc Brings up the calculation dialog click on the Calc control button.
Cancel Cancel will clear all entries and return the user to the Summary Screen
Clear Clear removes any entered values
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 355
values. Conversely, if the values are very dissimilar, it usually means that good
matching has not been achieved
The Composite Differential Liberation calculation is similar to the standard version; a typical
input dialog is shown below:
Input fields
The difference lies in the standard separator input section at the bottom of the dialog.
Separator Data The COMPOS input display contains a section for Separator Data.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 357
This allows the user to define a separator train through which the oil or
gas will be flashed to correct the Oil FVF, GOR and CGR. The
processes which are used to return an oil to standard conditions can
significantly change the final oil characteristics and the amount of gas
liberated on the way. When multiple samples are being analysed, it
may be necessary to have individual separator settings for each
stream. In this case, the individual radio button should be clicked on.
The stream separator settings can be accessed via the tabs at the
bottom of the table. All stages do not need to be entered and a last
flash to standard conditions is always included. The combo within the
separator data area switches between the modes available.
Flash straight to stock tank
Use Separator train
Use K values
Use Split Factors
The values within this separator data area are loaded and stored
separately from those within the Separator calculation.
The Copy Sep button will copy the stages from the Separator
Calculation into the Separator Data area. The Clear button removes all
values from within the Separator Data area.
For more information on K values see K Value 138 help
See more details on the use of chillers to calculate LNG recoveries and
the background to Split factors in Separator Calculations and the Path
to Surface 134
Copy from DIFF will copy across entries from the standard Differential Liberation 352
calculation
Command buttons
Calc Brings up the calculation dialog click on the Calc control button.
Cancel Cancel will clear all entries and return the user to the Summary Screen
Clear Clear removes any entered values
A Separator calculation can be initiated by selecting the Separator option from the calculation
menu or clicking on the icon shown above.
The separator process flashes the mixture at a fixed set of conditions. The liquid and gas are
split off to go on to the next stage of the process. The gas is assumed to collect together in
an accumulator.
The Separator option has only one input mode.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 359
A Separator Input screen has Data entry boxes which are provided for up to 20 separator
stages. Enter the pressure and temperature of each stage and click on the Calculate control
button.
The separator calculation screen is the same as that described for Constant Composition
Expansion 330 .
The analysis screen is also much the same as that described for CCE. The differences are
listed in the help on the Separator Analysis 362 dialog. For each calculation carried out, the
analysis display presents information on compositions K values,gas and oil gravities etc. In
addition, intermediate compositions can be extracted for further work as separate files or
streams.
Input fields
Stream
to
Calculate
The list box allows the user to select any combination of streams to calculate.
See PVT Project File Structure 188 for more information on streams
Options
The major model options are displayed. Only one set are allowed per file.
Clicking on the Change Button calls the File|Preferences 156 Dialog
Separator The Temperature and Pressure conditions of each stage of the separation
Train train can be defined here. Note that the assumption is that the liquid exiting
one stage is the input to the next stage, for example:
Chiller The gas from the separation process can be sent through a chain of up to 10
Train chillers. The first choice is to select the source of the gas to be chilled. The
default option is to use the accumulated gas from all the separator stages
which would include any gas evolved in the stock tank. The alternative would
be to use the gas up to a specified stage. If this option is selected an edit box
appears to allow the user to enter the final source stage.
See Separator Calculations and the Path to Surface 134 for more on chillers
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 361
If chillers are used the results dialog is split into two tables, the lower one
giving information on the chiller results
Command buttons
Calc Brings up the calculation dialog click on the Calc control button.
Cancel Cancel will clear all entries and return the user to the Summary Screen
Clear Clear removes any entered values
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 363
At each separator stage the gas evolved is added to that coming from the previous stages to
give the Accumulated Vapour Composition. This composition can be extracted to file or
stream in the same way as the total vapour and liquid. The mole% data indicates how much
of the original feed is left as vapour liquid etc. after each stage. The Total GOR, Oil Gravity
and Gas Gravity are also reported. If the composition is ungrouped, net and gross heating
values are also calculated.
Command buttons
The command buttons perform the following functions:
Exit Closes down the display and return to the calculation screen
All Stages The All Stages button brings up a display which summarizes the GOR and
other data for all separator stages:
Quality Clicking on the Quality Button will automatically generate a quality plot of the
Plot type shown below. Background to this plot is described in the utility menu help
for the Hoffmann Quality Plot. If the properties of the components give a
consistent flash, the light components should roughly fall along a straight line.
Clipboard Sends all or part of the analysis data to the clipboard by calling the Copy to
Clipboard 340 Dialog
Extract This option allows the user to save the composition (total, vapor or liquid)
being stored as a separate PVT file for later retrieval. Alternatively, a stream
can be created within the current PVT Project File.
If chillers have been used continuing down the stages will eventually show the
chiller stage data
Export Separator K Values can be used throughout the IPM Suite to replace multiple
K Values separator stages and represent complex separation plant. The K values for
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 365
individual and total separation plant are listed in the analysis table. These
values can be exported or sent internally to a stream by clicking on the Export
K Values button
Export Separator Split Factors can be used throughout the IPM Suite to replace
Split separator/chiller combinations. The analysis display lists the Split Factors for
Factors the overall plant.
Additional values can be calculated and exported by calling the Split Factor
Setup dialog. This is done by clicking on the Export Split Fac button
Input fields
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 367
These variables cannot be changed from this display. Use the Data |
Reference Data 259 option if a change is required.
The small table allows the user to select any combination of streams to
calculate. Selected stream are highlighted in red.
See PVT Project File Structure for more information on streams.
The reservoir reference conditions are also displayed within this table.
These variables can be changed from this display.
Alternatively, the Data | Reference Data option can be used to view or
change these values. An input screen contains radio buttons which allow
the user to swap between User Selected and Automatic modes
Multiple Streams - When 2 or more streams are selected an edit box appears in the top
Master Reference right of the dialog. This value acts as the common reference for all the
Depth selected streams.
Data Points This option defines how the ranges of temperature and pressures are
entered in the CCE calculation. Two modes are available:
User Selected The user can manually enter the range of depths
Automatic A range generation automatic feature can be used to
define the ranges of depth for which to run the
calculation
Calculation User Selected Data entry boxes are available where one can
Points manually enter depths
Automatic Data boxes are provided for entering the limits of the
depth to be covered above and below the reference
depth and the number of points to be calculated for
each direction. The points will be spread evenly
throughout the ranges selected
Temp. Gdnt. Temperature Gradient must also be entered in the appropriate box.
Calculate This check box enables/disables the calculation of the saturation
Saturation pressure.
Pressure As part of the gradient calculation, the saturation pressure of the mixture
can be calculated at each depth. Since this calculation takes some time
the option is given to leave out the calculation. Both User Selected and
Automatic dialogs contain a check box for this option. If the Saturation
Pressure is calculated a plot with Pressure Gradient against depth
becomes available. A typical plot is shown below:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 369
The input display contains a section for Separator Data. This allows the
user to define a separator train through which the oil or gas will be
flashed to correct the Oil FVF, GOR and CGR. The processes which
are used to return an oil to standard conditions can significantly change
the final oil characteristics and the amount of gas liberated on the way.
When multiple samples are being analysed, it may be necessary to
have individual separator settings for each stream. In this case, the
individual radio button should be clicked on. The stream separator
settings can be accessed via the tabs at the bottom of the table. All
stages do not need to be entered and a last flash to standard conditions
is always included. The combo within the separator data area switches
between the modes available.
Flash straight to stock tank
Use Separator train
Use K values
Use Split Factors
The values within this separator data area are loaded and stored
separately from those within the Separator calculation.
The Copy Sep button will copy the stages from the Separator
Calculation into the Separator Data area. The Clear button removes all
values from within the Separator Data area.
For more information on K values see K Value 138 help
See more details on the use of chillers to calculate LNG recoveries and
the background to Split factors in Separator Calculations and the Path
to Surface 134
Command buttons
Calc Brings up the calculation dialog click on the Calc control button.
Cancel Cancel will clear all entries and return the user to the Summary Screen
Clear Clear removes any entered values
To initiate the calculation click on the Calc control button. The Calculation Screen and its
options are described in Calculation Display 370 help.
See Density Modeling 116 for more information on oil density options.
Matching the EOS density to good experimental data usually results in the two densities
having very similar values. Conversely, if the values are very dissimilar, it usually means that
good matching has not been achieved.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 371
A Swelling Test calculation can be initiated by selecting the Swelling Test option from the
calculation menu or clicking on the icon shown above.
This option only becomes available if a second stream or more streams have been defined.
The Swelling Test mixes a pre-entered amount of the second stream with the first. The
Saturation Pressure of this new mixture is determined. The mixture is the flashed at the
Saturation Pressure to get the phase properties.
The Swelling Test option has only one input mode. A typical input display is shown below
A Swelling Test Input screen has Data entry boxes which are provided for up to 10
temperatures. In addition 10 second stream compositions can be entered for each
temperature. When mixed these numbers represent the mole percent of the second stream
within the first. If the component exists within the first stream the values are added together
and the properties of the primary stream (e.g. from regression) are used for both. If no
component exists of the same type a new component is created with the properties shown for
the second stream.
Input fields
Primary Stream These selection boxes allow to select which stream is injected in the
Injected Stream other
Test This field allows to enter the temperature at which the swelling test
Temperature experiment is performed
Secondary The Swelling Test has two input options for composition VIZ
Stream Values Mole %
Volume of gas per volume of oil
The input type is set by two radio buttons which are situated beneath
the input columns.
When either option is selected, the other is automatically calculated and
appears on the calculation display.
The unit for vol/vol input can be changed on the units display by scrolling
down to the Swelling Input unit. At present the units are set as volumes
of gas at standard conditions being added to oil at its saturation
pressure. The first step in the calculation is therefore to find the
saturation pressure of the oil and the density at that pressure. This
density allows the vol/vol input to be translated to its equivalent mole %
value. The calculation then proceeds as normal using this value.
Options The major model options are displayed. Only one set are allowed per
file.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 373
In addition, data entry boxes are provided for entering the limits of the
temperature and pressure ranges to be covered and the number of
points to be calculated for each variable.
The points will be spread evenly throughout the temperature and
pressure ranges selected.
All boxes should have an entry before proceeding to the Calculation
Dialog 370
Separator
Data
The input display contains a section for Separator Data. This allows the
user to define a separator train through which the oil or gas will be
flashed to correct the Oil FVF, GOR and CGR. The processes which
are used to return an oil to standard conditions can significantly change
the final oil characteristics and the amount of gas liberated on the way.
When multiple samples are being analysed, it may be necessary to have
individual separator settings for each stream. In this case, the individual
radio button should be clicked on. The stream separator settings can be
accessed via the tabs at the bottom of the table. All stages do not need
to be entered and a last flash to standard conditions is always included.
The combo within the separator data area switches between the modes
available.
Flash straight to stock tank
Use Separator train
Use K values
Use Split Factors
The values within this separator data area are loaded and stored
separately from those within the Separator calculation.
The Copy Sep button will copy the stages from the Separator
Calculation into the Separator Data area. The Clear button removes all
values from within the Separator Data area.
For more information on K values see K Value 138 help
See more details on the use of chillers to calculate LNG recoveries and
the background to Split factors in Separator Calculations and the Path to
Surface 134
Enter the temperatures and compositions required and click on the Calculate control button.
Note
The Swelling Test Saturation Pressure is available for matching 267
A slim-tube calculation can be initiated by selecting the Slim-tube simulation option from the
calculation menu.
This cell to cell model simulates gas injection into an oil reservoir. The program sets up a
series of cells as shown in figure below .
The cells do not need to be the same size but usually are. The temperatures of all the cells
remain the same at the initial reservoir value.
If the cell orientation is horizontal all the cells start at the designated reservoir pressure. If the
cells are inclined or vertical, the pressures are adjusted for the column of oil above the cell.
In each time step gas is added to the system. The gas injected into cell 1 is mixed with the
fluid there and the combination is flashed to find the new amount of gas and oil and their
properties.
Material Balance calculations and phase mobility criteria are used to calculate how much of
each phase is moved to cell 2. Again the new mixture is flashed and the excess is moved to
cell 3.
This process is repeated until the production cell is encountered. At this point the excess
volume and composition appear as wellstream products.
Whether multiple contact miscibility is achieved is usually taken from the estimation of the
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 375
minimum miscibility pressure (MMP). Definitions of the MMP can vary, but it is usually taken
as the pressure at which the recovery is 90% wnen 1.2 pore volumes of gas have been
injected. At pressures above MMP the gas is assumed to be miscible.
This Dialog is the main one for the slim tube simulation calculation.
The reasoning behind the calculation is described in Background to Slim-tube Simulation 374 .
The screen is brought up by selecting the Slim-tube Simulator option from the main
Calculation menu.
The dialog gives access to the other slim tube setup dialogs i.e.
Cells Setup 378
Rel Perms Setup 379
Times and Material Balance Setup 380
Input Fields
Stream Data The reservoir stream is the oil which will fill the slim-tube cells. The
injected stream is the gas which will be introduced to test its miscibility in
the oil
Temperature The slim-tube experiment is normally done at reservoir temperature. This
value will default to the entered reservoir temperature (see Reference
Data) , but it can be changed to a different value using the edit box
provided
Data Points This option defines how the ranges of temperature and pressures are
entered in the CCE calculation. Two modes are available:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 377
Cells The number and dimensions of the cells within the slim-tube are setup in
the Cells Setup Dialog.
Select the button Setup Cells 378 to define for each cell the dimensions
and its porosity and permeability.
Setup The relative permeability and associated data are entered within the Rel
Relative Perms Setup 379 Dialog
Permeability
Controls The number and size of the time steps are setup within the Times and
(Times + Material Balance Setup Dialog
Material
Balance)
Set All The slim-tube calculation is complex to set up. As it is trying to simulate a
Values to physical test , many variables (physical sizesates permeability’s) have to
Default be tuned to realistic values.
To help in this process a set of typical default values are provided.
Clicking on this button will fill all the Slim-tube dialogs with numbers which
will work for most oil/gas combinations.
Using this button will overwrite all previously entered data (except
pressures) on all Slim-tube dialogs.
Options The major model options are displayed.Only one set are allowed per file.
Clicking on the Change button calls the Preferences Dialog 157
Command Buttons
Calculation Dialog
The first step is to define the number of cells. The Production cell is normally the last and the
injection is the first. The depth is only for reference.The cells are normally horizontal. In this
case they are all at the same depth and pressure. If they are vertical, they are at different
pressures depending on the cell height and the oil density.The cells can contain the same
data. To do this enter the data into cell 1 and click on the Copy Cell 1 Data to All button.
Alternatively, all data can be individually entered within the table.
The first three columns define the dimensions of each cell. The last two indicate the Porosity
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 379
The Relative Permeability data can only be entered in table form at present. The exponents
are entered as fractions with respect to the oil saturation. A Capillary Pressure curve can also
be entered as a function of oil saturation.
Enter the number of time steps required. This action will set the size of the table. The times
can be set as a fixed value or with a different value for each step. To set the same time for
each step click on the fixed time step radio button and enter the time required in the edit box
provided. If different times are required, click on the variable time step radio button and enter
the times within the table.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 381
The Calculation Screen is loaded when the Calculate button is pressed on the Slim-tube Input
375 Dialog.
The display is in the form of a table with a Cell Detail button as the first column. The
properties listed are those of the fluid exiting the last cell at the end of the time step.The time
steps listed may change from those entered initially as the calculation will create new values
to reflect the intermediate flow changes within the model.
Results fields
Cell Detail Clicking on any of these buttons will bring up the Cell Detail 383 Dialog. This
displays the phase, properties and compositions in each cell at the
selected timestep. Any composition can be extracted as a stream for
further analysis. (See PVT Project File Structure 188 for more information
on streams)
Tabs If multiple pressures have been selected (see Slim-tube Input 375 Dialog)
the pressures appear as separate tables with tags at the bottom. The
user can move between the pressures by clicking on the tabs at the
bottom of the display
Each column has a variable name and unit as a heading. Scroll bars are provided to show
more variables and results.
Colours have been used with grids to indicate phase:
If the values have been already calculated the display will show the last set of values
calculated.
Command buttons
The display has several control buttons along the top which have the following functions:
Calc This option recalculates the table using the latest inputs provided
Plot This generates a full sized plot of the calculated results
Analysis This option produces a secondary screen giving the compositions
calculated at each measurement point along with details of the material
balance found at the end of the time step. The analysis screen also
provides access to the EXTRACT function which allows the user to export
a particular line of the calculation to a PVT file. Alternatively, the
intermediate composition can be copied to a stream within this project file.
See Slim-tube Analysis 382 dialog
Cancel This option closes down the display and passes the control back to the
input screen
Main This option closes down both the calculation and the input displays and
passes the control back to the main PVT screen
Clipboard This option allows the user to send the table results with/or without
headings to the clipboard
The composition within each cell can be viewed using the Slim-tube Cell Detail 383 dialog.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 383
The pressure run being viewed can be changed using the combo box provided. The time step
value displayed can be changed by clicking on the down or up arrow on the units or tens
control. Units will add or subtract 1 to the time step. Tens will add or subtract 10 to the time
step.
Command buttons
The command buttons perform the following functions:
Exit Close down the display and return to the slim-tube calculation display
Extract This option allows the user to save the composition (total, vapour or liquid)
being stored as a separate PVT file for later retrieval.
Alternatively, a stream can be created within the current PVT Project File
For each cell the table gives details of the phase, cell pressure, IFT, oil saturation and oil and
gas viscosities. In addition the composition within the cell is given. If the calculation goes into
adaptive mode, the result number will not be equivalent to the time step.
The cell compositions can be extracted to another stream for further analysis by:
1. Entering the required cell number in the edit box, or clicking on the arrow buttons until the
required value is reached.
2. Clicking on the Cell Composition to Stream Button.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 385
This feature provides the user with access to a subset of the calculation menu as a means of
checking the consistency of the entered composition information.
Calculation modes
The small display above provides options to calculate:
Input fields
Options The major model options are displayed. Only one set are allowed per
file.
The Flash to Standard Conditions option takes the fluid and does a CCE calculation at 60
degrees F and 14.7psia. The GOR, oil gravity and gas gravity are then reported as shown
below.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 387
The Flash through Separator Stages option mimics the full separator calculation but reports
only some of the results. See Quick Calc Separator Calculation Dialog 387 for more details.
2.9.14.2 Quick Calculation Separator Calculation Dialog
This display is called from the Quick Calculation Dialog 384 .
The objective is to provide a separator calculation which quickly provides the basic data of Oil
density and Gravity, Gas Gravity and GOR.
If separator conditions have already been defined the values will appear. If not enter the
temperatures and pressures in the Edit Boxes provided in the Values section of the display.
When ready click on Calc.
Command buttons
Use this option to create a stream which contains the maximum percentage of water before a
water phase forms. This operation is normally done to a matched stream .
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 389
The display is loaded from the Streams|Add Water to a Stream.... menu option
(see STREAM MENU) or from the icon above. The calculation can also be reached from the
Quick Calc dialog 384
Input fields
Stream
The list box allows the user to select any combination of streams to calculate.
See PVT Project File Structure 188 for more information on streams
Reservoir T Temperature and pressure of the reservoir fluid, and salinity of the saturating
and P water
Salinity
Output fields
Command buttons
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 391
Enter the range of pressures and temperatures required and click on Calculate.
This brings up the calculation results table. Click on Calc again.
See also:
PVT Project Structure 188 . -where streams fit in to the overall data structure
Water Modeling 132
Add fixed amount of water to a stream 429
Quick Calc dialog 384
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 393
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 395
By means of this menu it is possible to specify if to run the calculation with both the Full and
Lumped compositions or only with the Full or only with the Lumped.
For example, in the case of CCE, the screen will have this aspect:
In the case of the Quick Calculation 384 , the following calculation will be performed by with both
the Full and the Lumped compositions: Critical Point, Saturation Pressure at Reference
Conditions, Flash to Standard Conditions and Flash through Separator Stages.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 397
Details of Wax 100 and Hydrate 109 modeling and the model alternatives and references are
given in Models and Model Options Section.
This calculation can be initiated by selecting the Wax Amount (Multiphase Flash) from the Calc
Solids 397 menu.
Input fields
Data The mode can be changed using the radio buttons at the top right of the
Points display. Two modes are available for data input.
Automatic Data entry boxes are provided for entering the limits of the
temperature and pressure ranges to be covered and the
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 399
Stream
The list box allows the user to select any combination of streams to
calculate. See PVT Project File Structure 188 for more information on
streams
Options
The major model options are displayed.Only one set are allowed per
file. Clicking on the Change Button calls the Preferences Dialog 157 .
A combo box within the preferences dialog allows the user to select
between the various wax models.Clicking on the Reset Props button
resets the important component properties back to the default values
outlined by the model's author. WARNING using this button will reset
any solids regression that has been done.
See Wax Modeling Help 100 for more details on the model types
available.
See Lab Data/Matching 267 Help for more details on what can be
matched for solids
Split out Wax deposition is driven mainly by long-chain paraffins. This means that
Pseudo in order to properly characterize waxes it is required to define in detail
Components the hydrocarbons with high carbon number. This option splits the
Note that the wax formation effect is very much driven by temperature and very little pressure
dependence is shown.
At least one pressure and temperature should be defined before proceeding to the Calculation
Dialog 409 .
Command buttons
Calc To bring up the calculation dialog click on the Calc control button. The
calculation dialog which appears is similar in structure and features to that
described for the two-phase flash CCE 330 calculation.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 401
The temperature value displayed can be changed by clicking on the down or up arrow within
the temperature area (top left).
The pressure value displayed can be changed by clicking on the down or up arrow within the
pressure area (top right).
Command buttons
The command buttons perform the following functions:
Exit Close down the display and return to the calculation screen
Clipboard This sends all or part of the analysis data to the clipboard by calling the
Copy to Clipboard 340 Dialog
Extract This option allows the user to save the composition (total, vapour or liquid)
being stored as a separate PVT file (To File) for later retrieval.
Alternatively, a stream can be created within the current PVT Project File
(To Stream). The analysis display for a separator calculation is more
complex
Quality Clicking on the Quality Button will automatically generate a quality plot of
Plot the type shown below. Background to this plot is described in the utility
menu help for the Hoffmann Quality Plot. If the properties of the
components give a consistent flash, the light components should roughly fall
along a straight line.
This calculation can be initiated by selecting the Wax Appearance Temperature from the Calc
Solids 397 menu:
See Wax Modeling 100 for more details.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 403
Input fields
Stream
The list box allows the user to select any combination of streams to
calculate. See PVT Project File Structure 188 for more information on
streams
Method A list of models are provided.
See Wax Modeling 100 for more details.
Data The mode can be changed using the radio buttons at the top right of the
Points display. Two modes are available for data input.
Automatic Data entry boxes are provided for entering the limits of the
pressure ranges to be covered and the number of points to
be calculated for each variable. The points will be spread
evenly throughout the selected pressure ranges
Calculation
Limits
Some of the limits of the calculation can be adjusted in this section of the
dialog. The minimum and maximum temperatures dictate the range in
which wax will be looked for. The maximum number of steps sets how
many iterations the program allows before it gives up looking for a
solution. The minimum test solid percent is the value used to determine if
wax is just forming i.e. the WAT. The program looks for a value of
percent solids between zero and the Min Test Solid % to say that it is at
the Wax Appearance Temperature
Split out Wax deposition is driven mainly by long-chain paraffins. This means that
Pseudo in order to properly characterize waxes it is required to define in detail
Components the hydrocarbons with high carbon number. This option splits the
pseudo components in its SCN components to more accurately model
waxes
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 405
Note that the wax formation effect is very much driven by temperature and very little pressure
dependence is shown.
At least one pressure and temperature should be defined before proceeding to the Calculation
Dialog 409 .
Command buttons
Calc To bring up the calculation dialog click on the Calc control button. The
calculation dialog which appears is similar in structure and features to that
described for the two-phase flash CCE 330 calculation.
This calculation can be initiated by selecting the Hydrate Formation Pressure Option from the
Calc Solids 397 menu:
See Hydrate Modeling 109 for more details.
Hydrates (known also as clathrates) are important to the petroleum industry because they
form at temperatures above that of normal ice.
Plugging due to hydrate formation can potentially occur at any location from the reservoir to
surface where the pressure is greater than the minimum value for the fluid temperature. For a
range of Temperatures the program will calculate the minimum pressure at which hydrates will
form.
More details on the formation of hydrates is given in Background to Hydrates 107 .
Input fields
Data The mode can be changed using the radio buttons at the top right of the
Points display. Two modes are available for data input.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 407
Automatic Data entry boxes are provided for entering the limits of the
temperature ranges to be covered and the number of points
to be calculated for each variable. The points will be spread
evenly throughout the selected temperature ranges
The list box allows the user to select any combination of streams to
calculate. See PVT Project File Structure 188 for more information on
streams
Hydrate Type The user can choose between Hydrate types I or II or both
Assume (New!!!)
free water The normal model assumption within PVTP is that free water exists
phase exists within the system (see Hydrate Modeling 109 ). If water is defined within
the composition and the composition is a gas at the calculation pressure
and temperature a second model is called. This calculates the formation
pressure required to form hydrates directly from molecules within the
gas phase. The mechanism for this is described in Hydrates with no
water phase 111 . Formation of hydrates directly from a gas phase
This area allows the user to calculate the effect of adding various
inhibitors to the fluid.
A combo box allows the user to select from a list of common inhibitors.
Up to 5 inhibitor concentrations can be entered using the edit box
provided. All values should be in weight percent. The Clear Percents
button removes all entries while the check box allows the user to switch
on and off the calculation without loosing the entries. More information
on inhibitors is given in Hydrate Inhibition 112 . See also help on the
Minimum Inhibitor Concentration 409 calculation
All boxes should have an entry before proceeding to the Calculation dialog.
Restrictions
No hydrate calculation can be carried out with a Grouped composition. The modeling
of hydrates is dependent on the identification of the type and amount of the individual
small gas molecules which become entrapped in the ice. Only ungrouped compositions
allow these species to be identified. See Background to Hydrates 107 for more details.
Attempting to enter a hydrate calculation with a grouped composition will produce the
following message:
Command buttons
Calc To bring up the calculation dialog click on the Calc control button. The
calculation dialog which appears is similar in structure and features to that
described for the two-phase flash CCE 330 calculation.
Cancel Cancel will clear all entries and return the user to the Summary Screen
Clear Clear removes any entered values
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 409
The selected inhibitor concentrations are coloured red and the new pressure values are
shown immediately afterwards.
When complete the results are available for export to Prosper 44 by clicking on the Export
button.
Hydrate Export If a hydrate formation Pressure 405 calculation is done the analysis button
is replaced by an export version. This allows direct output to an ASCII
file which can be taken into PROSPER.
This calculation can be initiated by selecting the Hydrate Min. Inhibitor Concentration from the
Calc Solids 397 menu:
See Hydrate Modeling 109 for more details.
Hydrates are important to the petroleum industry because they form at temperatures above
that of normal ice.
Plugging due to hydrate formation can potentially occur at any location from the reservoir to
surface where the pressure is greater than the minimum value for the fluid temperature.
Inhibitors raise the pressure at which a hydrate forms for a particular temperature.
This calculation estimates the amount of a selected inhibitor required to provide no hydrate
formation at an entered temperature and pressure.
More details on the formation of these troublesome clathrates is given in Background to
Hydrates 107 .
Input fields
Stream
The combo box allows the user to select the active stream and
archives to calculate. See PVT Project File Structure 188 for more
information on streams
Protection up to... Data entry boxes are provided for entering the target P and T. The
Pressure program calculates what inhibitor concentration which gives the start
Temperature of hydrate formation at the entered T and P.
Inhibitor Select from the combo-box the type of inhibitor to use
Results At the bottom of the screen a Results section summarises the amount
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 411
Procedure
1) Enter a T and P.
2) Select an inhibitor and a model.
3) Press Calc. and the answer will appear as a weight and mole percentage in the results
section at the bottom of the display.
See also Hydrate modeling and Hydrate Inhibition 112 .
Command buttons
Calc To bring up the calculation dialog click on the Calc control button. The
calculation dialog which appears is similar in structure and features to that
described for the two-phase flash CCE 330 calculation.
Cancel Cancel will clear all entries and return the user to the Summary Screen
Exit Validate the entries and close the screen
Restrictions
No hydrate calculation can be carried out with a Grouped composition. The modeling
of hydrates is dependent on the identification of the type and amount of the individual
small gas molecules which become entrapped in the ice. Only ungrouped compositions
allow these species to be identified. See Background to Hydrates 107 for more details.
Attempting to enter a hydrate calculation with a grouped composition will produce the
following message:
This option allows the user to change the stream name and the comment associted with the
stream.
Load the display from the Streams|Edit details option within the STREAM MENU
Select a stream using the combo box ,change the comment or name and press EXIT when
complete.
See also:
PVT PROJECT where streams fit in to the overall data structure
STRUCTURE 188
SELECT this display has an option to add an empty stream
COMPONENTS 189
EDIT MOLE streams can be copied and their compositions edited using this option
PERCENTS 215
ADD STREAM 413 copies existing streams or imports streams from other files
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 413
Use this option to copy an existing stream or to import a stream from another PVT project file
.The display is loaded from the Streams|Add stream menu option(see STREAM MENU 412 )
Command buttons
Stream
To copy:
1. Rename stream if required
2. Highlight stream to copy
3. Click on Copy Stream button
Import from PVI File This option allows to extract a stream from another PVTP file
(extension .PVI) and import it in the current file. After selecting this
option a dialog is displayed.
Select Import and open the .PVI to extract the stream from.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 415
In the List of streams all the streams available are reported. Enter a
New Stream Name and Comment and then select Read Stream
to import the EOS composition
Import from ASCII This option allows to enter EOS composition in PVTP from a variety of
File ASCII files:
.PRP from Petroleum Experts IPM
.PVO from PVTi
.GEM from CMG simulators
.EQL from ELF Type
See also:
PVT PROJECT STRUCTURE 188 - where streams fit in to the overall data structure
SELECT COMPONENTS 189 - this display has an option to add an empty stream
EDIT MOLE PERCENTS 215 - streams can be copied and their compositions edited using this
option.
DELETE STREAM 415 - removes unwanted streams.
.
Use this option to remove an unwanted stream .The display is loaded from the Streams|
Delete .Stream menu option(see STREAM MENU 412 )
Select the required stream(s) and press Delete Stream. The user will be prompted to
confirm this operation. If only one stream is available the delete option is not allowed.
See also:
PVT PROJECT STRUCTURE 188 . -where streams fit in to the overall data structure
SELECT COMPONENTS 189 - this display has an option to add an empty stream
EDIT MOLE PERCENTS 215 - streams can be copied and their compositions edited using this
option.
ADD STREAM 413 - copies existing streams or imports streams from other files
The display is loaded from the Streams|Create a Stream.... menu option (see STREAM
MENU 412 ) or from the icon above.
The Target GOR method is a unique feature of Petroleum Experts IPM software that allows to
recombine the fluid to match a certain GOR.
Use this option to create a stream with a particular GOR by combining the separator gas and
stock tank oil from a matched stream.
This is particularly useful when one wants to estimate the correct composition of a wrongly
recombined (or sampled) fluid or when the GOR changes due to the reservoir depletion below
saturation pressure.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 417
Input fields
These are the options available:
Source
Stream
The list box allows the user to select any combination of streams to
calculate. See PVT Project File Structure 188 for more information on
streams
Target GOR This is the value of GOR the original fluid will be recombined to match
Stream GOR This is the original fluid GOR
Target GOR Two methods are available. The alternatives refer to the source of the gas
Method and oil which are mixed to create the new fluid which matches the target
GOR.
Use The stream performs a full separator calculation using the
Separator separator train input at the bottom of the dialog. The
fluids accumulated gas and dead oil compositions found during
this flash are then mixed in the GOR target calculation. The
Note that the resulting composition can be very different using the two
methods. Since the PSAT method uses gas and oil which already have a
significant GOR mixing these two fluids cannot produce a fluid with a GOR
outwith the range of the intial values . To help the user these limits are
displayed as the maximum and minimum GOR for this method
Maximum The number of iterations carried out and the accuracy tolerance (% error) of
iterations the final value can be changed using the edit boxes provided
Test for
Convergence
Separator This section is active when the Target GOR Method is set to Use
Data Separator Fluids.
The input display contains a section for Separator Data. This allows the
user to define a separator train through which the oil or gas will be flashed
to correct the Oil FVF, GOR and CGR. The processes which are used to
return an oil to standard conditions can significantly change the final oil
characteristics and the amount of gas liberated on the way. When multiple
samples are being analysed, it may be necessary to have individual
separator settings for each stream. In this case, the individual radio button
should be clicked on. The stream separator settings can be accessed via
the tabs at the bottom of the table. All stages do not need to be entered
and a last flash to standard conditions is always included. The combo within
the separator data area switches between the modes available.
Flash straight to stock tank
Use Separator train
Use K values
Use Split Factors
The values within this separator data area are loaded and stored
separately from those within the Separator calculation.
The Copy Sep button will copy the stages from the Separator Calculation
into the Separator Data area. The Clear button removes all values from
within the Separator Data area.
For more information on K values see K Value 138 help
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 419
See more details on the use of chillers to calculate LNG recoveries and the
background to Split factors in Separator Calculations and the Path to
Surface 134
IMPORTANT NOTE
When this stream is created it is done with surface gas and oil. The process
therefore mimics a fluid recombination. If the objective is to reflect a loss or gain
of gas at reservoir conditions then the approach is not entirely appropriate. The
gas evolved near saturation or that present in the gas cap may be quite
different to that produced from the separators. Using the swelling test or other
methodologies may produce better results.
Command buttons
Exit will close down the dialog and retain any entries which have been made
Cancel will close down the dialog and discard any entries which have been made
Create Stream will create a new stream matching the entered Target GOR
Delete will take the user to the stream delete dialog where any unwanted streams
can be removed
View will bring up the View Properties 247 dialog.This allows the user to see the
stream produced and check its properties using the Quick Calc function
See also:
Technical Overview General information about the program capabilities
11
PVT PROJECT where streams fit in to the overall data structure
STRUCTURE 188
SELECT this display has an option to add an empty stream
COMPONENTS 189
EDIT MOLE streams can be copied and their compositions edited using this
PERCENTS 215 option
ADD STREAM 413 copies existing streams or imports streams from other files
DELETE STREAM 415 removes unwanted streams
The display is loaded from the Streams|Create a Stream.... menu option(see STREAM MENU
412 ) or from the icon above.
The Target GOR method is a unique feature of Petroleum Experts IPM software that allows to
recombine the fluid to match a certain Saturation Pressure (PSAT).
Use this option to create a stream with a particular Saturation Pressure by combining the
separator gas and stock tank oil from a matched stream.
This is particularly useful when one wants to estimate the correct composition of a wrongly
recombined (or sampled) fluid.
Use this option to create a stream with a particular PSAT 328 by combining the separator gas
and stock tank oil from a matched stream .
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 421
Input fields
These are the options available:
Source
Stream
The list box allows the user to select any combination of streams to
calculate. See PVT Project File Structure 188 for more information on
streams
Target PSAT This is the value of PSAT the original fluid will be recombined to match
Temperature This is the original fluid GOR
Target Fluid When recombining oil and gas, depending on the proportions either an oil or
Type a gas can be obtained, both having the same PSAT.
The phase envelope illustrates that:
In correspondence of the same PSAT two fluids are possible, an oil and a
gas.
Target PSAT Two methods are available. The alternatives refer to the source of the gas
Method and oil which are mixed to create the new PSAT fluid.
Use The stream performs a full separator calculation using the
Separator separator train input at the bottom of the dialog. The
fluids accumulated gas and dead oil compositions found during this
flash are then mixed in the PSAT target calculation
Use fluids The stream has its saturation pressure calculated at the
from near input temperature. A flash is then carried out a pressure just
PSAT below this PSAT value. The gas and oil compositions found
during this flash are then mixed in the PSAT target
calculation
Note that the results can be very different using the two methods. In general
a much higher maximum PSAT can be found using method 2.
Maximum The number of iterations carried out and the accuracy tolerance (% error) of
iterations the final value can be changed using the edit boxes provided
Test for
Convergence
Separator This section is active when the Target PSAT Method is set to Use
Data Separator Fluids.
The input display contains a section for Separator Data. This allows the
user to define a separator train through which the oil or gas will be flashed
to correct the Oil FVF, GOR and CGR. The processes which are used to
return an oil to standard conditions can significantly change the final oil
characteristics and the amount of gas liberated on the way. When multiple
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 423
Command buttons
Exit will close down the dialog and retain any entries which have been made
Cancel will close down the dialog and discard any entries which have been made
Create will create a new stream matching the entered Target GOR
Stream
Delete will take the user to the stream delete dialog where any unwanted streams
can be removed
View will bring up the View Properties 247 dialog.This allows the user to see the
stream produced and check its properties using the Quick Calc function
Plot Unlike black oil models , EoS modeling is limited by the physical and
Profile mathematical realities of mixing two fluids.e the separator liquid and gas. In
a typical system the saturation pressure of the mixture will rise from either
extreme to a maximum somewhere in middle. This feature highlights this
limitation by plotting the range of possible saturation pressures that can be
derived from mixing the gas and oil. The typical plot below is taken from a
condensate sample.
The points with the additional squares around are gas. The star on the plot
marks the original mixture's saturation pressure. It can be seen from this plot
that near critical fluids ,in general, will not produce a mixture saturation
pressure very much above that of the original mixture. See additional help on
Plotting 441 .
See also:
Technical Overview General information about the program capabilities
11
PVT PROJECT where streams fit in to the overall data structure
STRUCTURE 188
SELECT this display has an option to add an empty stream
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 425
COMPONENTS 189
EDIT MOLE streams can be copied and their compositions edited using this
PERCENTS 215 option
ADD STREAM 413 copies existing streams or imports streams from other files
DELETE STREAM 415 removes unwanted streams
This stream menu 412 item calls the Maximum Water Saturation 388 display which is also
available from the Quick Calculation Dialog 384 .
This allows the user to calculate the amount of water that will saturate the hydrocarbon
stream and create a stream containing this amount.
Input fields
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 427
The list box allows the user to select any combination of streams to calculate.
See PVT Project File Structure 188 for more information on streams
Reservoir T Temperature and pressure of the reservoir fluid, and salinity of the saturating
and P water
Salinity
Output fields
Command buttons
Enter the range of pressures and temperatures required and click on Calculate.
This brings up the calculation results table. Click on Calc again.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 429
See also:
Technical Overview General information about the program capabilities
11
Use this option to create a stream with a particular mole percentage of water. This operation
is normally done to a matched stream .
The display is loaded from the Streams|Add Water to a Stream.... menu option
(see STREAM MENU 412 ) or from the icon above.
PVT lab experiments are normally done on samples from which all the water has been
removed. The PVT report must therefore be matched with no water present. This feature
allows a known water to be added and the effect of the water on the phase equilibria to be
calculated.
A typical display would be:
Input fields
Source
Stream
The list box allows the user to select any combination of streams to calculate.
See PVT Project File Structure 188 for more information on streams
Mole This is the desired mole % of water that will be achieved at the end of the
Percent calculation
Water
Salinity Salinity of the water to add
Command buttons
Create Stream This button creates the new stream with added water
Cancel Discard any change and exit the screen
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 431
Enter the mole percent of water required in the edit box provided and click on Create Stream.
See also:
PVT Project Where streams fit in to the overall data structure
Structure 188
Two streams can be blended to form one with a combination of the original stream properties.
This option is available from the Streams Menu 412 .
A typical display looks like this.
Input fields
Blend Select the two streams to blend and enter the mole % of each of the two
streams streams
Blend to Two options are available:
New Stream The two mixed streams will form a separate new
stream, which will be added to the main Stream list
Existing Stream An existing stream will be modified by blending the
defined mole % of another stream.
The Existing Stream is selected from the Existing
Stream section
New Stream / This section allows to define the Name of the new created stream and a
Archive Comment
Command buttons
Blend This button performs the blending calculation and creates the new
blended stream or modifies an existing one
Cancel Discard any change and exit the screen
See also:
Technical Overview General information about the program capabilities
11
PVT PROJECT where streams fit in to the overall data structure
STRUCTURE 188
SELECT this display has an option to add an empty stream
COMPONENTS 189
EDIT MOLE streams can be copied and their compositions edited using this
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 433
This option allows the user to calculate the amount of two streams that would be required to
produce a mixture of the desired GOR. After calculation the stream can be created.
The display is loaded from the Streams|Allocate:Blend streams.... menu option(see
STREAM MENU 412 ) .
Input fields
Blend Stream 1 These selection boxes allow to define the two streams to blend
Blend Stream 2
Target GOR This is the value of GOR the two fluids will be combined to match
Temperature This is the original fluid GOR
Target PSAT Two methods are available. The alternatives refer to the source of the
Method gas and oil which are mixed to create the new PSAT fluid.
Use The stream performs a full separator calculation using the
Separator separator train input at the bottom of the dialog. The
fluids accumulated gas and dead oil compositions found during this
flash are then mixed in the PSAT target calculation
Use fluids The stream has its saturation pressure calculated at the
from near input temperature. A flash is then carried out a pressure just
PSAT below this PSAT value. The gas and oil compositions found
during this flash are then mixed in the PSAT target
calculation
Note that the results can be very different using the two methods. In
general a much higher maximum PSAT can be found using method 2.
Maximum The number of iterations carried out and the accuracy tolerance (%
iterations error) of the final value can be changed using the edit boxes provided
Test for
Convergence
Separator The input display contains a section for Separator Data. This allows the
Data user to define a separator train through which the oil or gas will be
flashed to correct the Oil FVF, GOR and CGR. The processes which
are used to return an oil to standard conditions can significantly change
the final oil characteristics and the amount of gas liberated on the way.
When multiple samples are being analysed, it may be necessary to
have individual separator settings for each stream. In this case, the
individual radio button should be clicked on. The stream separator
settings can be accessed via the tabs at the bottom of the table. All
stages do not need to be entered and a last flash to standard conditions
is always included. The combo within the separator data area switches
between the modes available.
Flash straight to stock tank
Use Separator train
Use K values
Use Split Factors
The values within this separator data area are loaded and stored
separately from those within the Separator calculation.
The Copy Sep button will copy the stages from the Separator
Calculation into the Separator Data area. The Clear button removes all
values from within the Separator Data area.
For more information on K values see K Value 138 help
See more details on the use of chillers to calculate LNG recoveries and
the background to Split factors in Separator Calculations and the Path
to Surface 134
Results
Mole % of Stream 1 and 2 This results area reports the proportions of the two
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 435
Weight % of Stream 1 and 2 fluids to blend in order to achieve the target GOR
IMPORTANT NOTE
The calculation will assume that all the components are perfectly mixed and
come to thermodynamic equilibrium. In the real case of two fluids meeting at a
manifold the contact time and phase splits present may not allow this to occur
Command buttons
Exit will close down the dialog and retain any entries which have been made
Cancel will close down the dialog and discard any entries which have been made
Calculate will calculate the % of the two streams that are able to match the entered
Target GOR
Create will create a new stream based on the calculated mixing proportions
Stream
Plot The Plot Profile button will display graphically the full range of possible
Profile fluids.
If the target GOR is to be with respect to a separator train setup the required stages in
the edit boxes provided and click on the Use Separator Train.... check box. If no
selections are made in the Separator Data area the fluid will be flashed straight to stock
tank conditions i.e.. standard temperature and pressure.
Enter the target GOR and click on the Calculate button.
As the program iterates the iteration number and best solution to date will be displayed
When a solution is found ( within the convergence test limit) the mole percents and weight
percents of each stream requied will be displayed
Click on Create Stream if required.
On successful completion the dialog will shut down and return to the main display
See also:
PVT PROJECT STRUCTURE 188 . -where streams fit in to the overall data structure
SELECT COMPONENTS 189 - this display has an option to add an empty stream
EDIT MOLE PERCENTS 215 - streams can be copied and their compositions edited using this
option.
ADD STREAM 413 - copies existing streams or imports streams from other files
DELETE STREAM 415 - removes unwanted streams..
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 437
2.12 Reporting
This section describes the reporting options and procedures used in the PVT package.
Under the Report option on the main menu there is a Setup Report Directories option. On
selecting this the user is presented with a dialog which requires three pieces of information.
The first of these is where the default or system report templates are stored. This is the path
to an archive file which contains the system report templates in a compressed form. This file
will normally be in the same directory as the PVTP executable. The next field in the dialog
requires the path to the default directory where reports printed to file are to be placed and the
final field is the path to a directory where user defined report templates are to be stored.
2.12.2 Reports
The reporting interface gives complete control over how the reports are formatted and what
information is utilised to make up the report. This is facilitated by the use of report templates
which can be edited to suit the user's own requirements. One can choose to use the default
report templates provided with the system or can choose to create slightly different versions
of these reports. The selected templates can then be used to generate the actual reports
which can be sent to a variety of places (printer, file or screen). The report templates are
displayed in a hierarchy and all templates which have been selected (by double-clicking on it)
show an X in the check-box beside the template name. The colour of this X denotes whether
it is the system (black) template or a user defined (red) template which is being used.
There are two modes for the editing of report templates: System and user. System mode
does not allow to change any template whereas user mode allows to create new user defined
templates from scratch or based on an already existing system report template and also
allows to edit an existing user defined report template. Selecting user mode also makes the
user Reports section of the template hierarchy visible. The user Reports hierarchy contains all
report templates which have been tagged as being a derivation of a system report template
as well as any free standing user defined templates.
The reporting main window consists of four main parts: The command segment at the top of
the dialog containing the buttons, the report selection hierarchy, the output device selection
group and the template type selection group. The output device group is only used when
printing from selected report templates.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 439
The native (.FR) file format can only be read by the reporting system whereas the RTF format
can be read by many Windows word processing applications. When printing to file the user
will be presented with the following dialog:
The default directory will be set to the default output directory but this can be altered using
the Select Directory button. This can then be applied to all output files by using Change All. If
it is necessary to change the output directory of one of the files, this can be achieved by using
the Browse button associated with each report. The filenames can themselves be edited in
the text box which contains them.
For any given report in the system hierarchy the user can choose to view or print a report
using either the system report template provided or a user defined report template based on
that system report template (or at least that position in the hierarchy) or can choose a report
grouping which can be made up from a combination of user and system reports. The user can
choose between these options using the report template type selection group at the bottom
right of the main window. If one selects the user report template option for any hierarchy
position and there are multiple user defined report templates for that position then a dialog
appears which allows to select the particular desired template.
Double clicking on any of the report templates (or selecting and pressing Ok) will cause it to
become the user defined report template for that hierarchy position for the current reports
session. The default choice is the topmost user defined report template. One can stop a user
defined report template from being associated with that hierarchy position by selecting it and
then pressing Delete. This does not actually delete the report template (it can still be seen
within the user Reports section of the hierarchy).
If a report grouping is selected, then a similar dialog appears and the user can select the
appropriate group file. After selected a file all the reports referenced in the group will appear
‘checked’ in the hierarchy and one can then press print for all of these reports to be sent to
the selected output device.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 441
2.13 Plotting
This section describes the reporting options and procedures used in the PVT plotting
functions.
The plot window contains may options which can be selected via a menu or toolbar. These
options are details in Plotting – Menu and Toolbar section. A plot can present data form
multiple stream calculations, allowing the user to visualise the effect of different compositions,
matching scenarios etc. The plot below shows the variation in liquid dropout of samples taken
at different depths.
See also
Manipulating Streams 442
Manipulating Curves 442
Plot Menu and Toolbar 444
Changing Colours 446
Changing Labels 447
Changing Variables 449
Printing Plots 451
Clicking on the small square to the side of the stream name allows the user to manipulate the
plotting of the stream Clicking on this square brings up a small menu as shown below:
Hide Stream will change all the curves belonging to this stream to the background
colour, hiding it
Show Stream returns the stream curves to view. Individual curves can also be
hidden using the curve menu described below
Change Colour brings up the colour selection menu
See also
Plotting 441
Manipulating Curves 442
Plot Menu and Toolbar 444
Changing Colours 446
Changing Labels 447
Changing Variables 449
Printing Plots 451
2.13.2 Manipulating Curves
On each plot is a set of small squares which indicate values from which the plot was derived.
Passing over a square with the mouse pointer brings up a small window which gives the
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 443
Hide Curve will change all the curves belonging to this stream to the background
colour, hiding it
Hide Stream will change all the curves belonging to this stream to the background
colour, hiding it
Show Stream returns the stream curves to view. Individual curves can also be
hidden using the curve menu described below
Change Colour brings up the colour selection menu
Point Settings allows the user to adjust the size and number of the points shown for
each curve in a stream.
Selecting this option brings up the small dialog shown below:
The Plot Point Ratio indicates what fraction of the points will be
displayed. The example above would show only one point in ten.
To show all points enter a value of one.
The Point size radio buttons allows the user to adjust the size of the
Point Square.
All point drawing can be switched off and on. See Labels and Options
447 Dialog
Copy to Clipboard these options allow to export the plot to the Windows Clipboard or to
Copy to Metafile an export file (Metafile)
Menu options
PLOT TITLE This may be adjusted if required. See Labels and Options 447 Dialog
VARIABLES Up to 2 y axis variables may be displayed. This is done by calling the
DISPLAYED Variable Selection 449 Dialog using the Variables. Menu option
MAIN PLOT The main Plot window shows the curves drawn in engineering units
WINDOW
LEGEND BOXES Various legend boxes give additional information
Note the legend boxes and the plot labels can be switched off within
the Labels 447 Dialog
MOUSE A mouse position indicator (bottom right of main plot) which shows the
POSITION current position in the units of the plot. This function can be used to
INDICATOR find the value of an intermediate point on any drawn curve
ZOOMING Any part of the plot can be enlarged by adopting the following
procedure
To return the plot to its original size, double-click the mouse anywhere
within the main plot area
See also
Plotting 441
Manipulating Streams 442
Plot Menu and Toolbar 444
Changing Colours 446
Changing Labels 447
Changing Variables 449
Printing Plots 451
2.13.3 The Plot Menu and Toolbar
The plot window is composed of:
MENU
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 445
SUBMENUS
File This menu contains the File new, open, save, etc., typical of Windows
programs
Printer Setup 87 standard Windows Printer Setup display
Print 451
Exit
View This menu allows the user to adjust what is seen within the display.
Clicking on the menu item will toggle off and on the particular option.
The options are stored on a file by file basis
Display Scales 448 Set the axes scales
Labels 447 Set the Axes Label and Plot Title Text
Colours 446 Select the colours of the various Plot Elements and sets
pen size
Test Points 298 Measured points to be visualised but not necessarily
matched to
Units 171 Change the Units used within the plot
Redraw Redraw the plot at its original size
Toolbar
See also
Plotting 441
Manipulating Streams 442
Manipulating Curves 442
This option allows the user to change the colours used in the plot and set the default for all
new plots.This screen allows the user to select the colour for each of the text plot
components listed. A colour can be defined for 2 variables and 10 streams
First select the colour scheme to be applied to the plot i.e. Colour, Gray Scale or
Monochrome. Next select a plot component by clicking on a name in the list. The sample
panel will show the current colour. Press Change General Colour or the individual Change
button to bring up the standard color selection dialog shown below. Choose the colour that is
required and press OK. The sample panel will show the choice. The line width can also be
set up on this display . To change a line width press on the required check box and press OK.
Thicker lines are useful when printing out plots particularily for Fax use. Clicking on OK will
change the colours in the plot being viewed and close down the selection window . Pressing
Apply will change the plot without closing the window.
Clicking on Save Colours will save all the colour selections to disk to be applied as default to
all new plots.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 447
See also
Plotting 441
Manipulating Streams 442
Manipulating Curves 442
Plot Menu and Toolbar 444
Changing Labels 447
Changing Variables 449
Printing Plots 451
To change the axes labels and the title of the plot enter the text required in the appropriate
Edit Boxes and press OK.
The plot will be redrawn automatically. Clicking off the Show curve labels on plot will
remove the small curve labels. Clicking off the Show legend boxes on plot will remove the
legend boxes , increasing the size of the main plot. Clicking off the Show Reference Data
Lines will remove the indication of reference depth , reference pressure and reservoir
temperature. Clicking off the Show Individual Plot Points will remove the small squares on
the curves which represent actual values (see Main Plot Dialog for more details). Cancel
shuts down the display without implementing any changes.
See also
Plotting 441
Manipulating Streams 442
Manipulating Curves 442
Plot Menu and Toolbar 444
Changing Colours 446
Changing Variables 449
Printing Plots 451
2.13.6 Plotting - Changing Scales
Clicking on the Scales Option within the Main Plot Dialog Display Menu brings up this dialog .
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 449
To change the scaling of the plot enter the values required in the Change Scales Edit Boxes
and press OK. The plot will be redrawn automatically. Cancel shuts down the display without
implementing any changes.
See also
Plotting 441
Manipulating Streams 442
Manipulating Curves 442
Plot Menu and Toolbar 444
Changing Colours 446
Changing Labels 447
Changing Variables 449
Printing Plots 451
2.13.7 Plotting - Changing Variables
Clicking on the Variables Option within the Main Plot Dialog Display Menu brings up this
dialog .
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 451
The user can use the list boxes to select which variables are plotted on which axis.
Clicking on OK will close the display and redraw the plot.
Cancel shuts down the display without implementing any changes.
See also
Plotting 441
Manipulating Streams 442
Manipulating Curves 442
Plot Menu and Toolbar 444
Changing Colours 446
Changing Labels 447
Printing Plots 451
2.13.8 Plotting - Printing a Plot
Clicking on the Print Option within the Main Plot Dialog File Menu brings up this dialog .
This option will send the plot to the primary printer as set up under Windows or an alternative
, if selected using this dialog.
The margin area allows the user to enter top, bottom, left, and right margins.
The units of margin size can be selected using the Inches and Millimeters radio buttons.
The listbox on the right of the display shows the printers available , with the current choice of
destination highlighted.
To select another printer , click once on its name. A small panel with radio buttons gives the
user the opportunity to select between the three main colour schemes i.e. Monochrome,
Greyscale or Colour.
Line Widths It may be useful when printing a plot which may subsequently be faxed
to increase the line width This can be done via the Colours option
within the main display
Print Close the display and print report with current settings via the standard
print control dialog shown below
See also
Plotting 441
Manipulating Streams 442
Manipulating Curves 442
Plot Menu and Toolbar 444
Changing Colours 446
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 453
2.14 Utilities
This menu gives the user access to a series of utilities designed to help with general PVT
work and to validate PVT report data
This small dialog is selected via the Utilities Menu 454 and can be used in two different modes:
To calculate Enter the API in the edit box and press Calc
oil density
from API
To calculate Enter the oil density in the edit box and press Calc
API from
oil density
The units of density displayed can be changed using the units dialog.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 455
The objective is to provide a tool which helps to validate PVT report Black Oil data.
The calculation does not use any Equation of State model; it works only on the mass values
within the dialog. If a report is consistent the mass of fluid removed at the reservoir should
tally with the mass of gas plus oil at the surface.
Fluid
The calculator comes in 2 forms depending on the reservoir fluid:
Oil Using the basis of 1 stock tank barrel, it is possible from the stock tank oil
density GOR and gas gravity plus the equivalent separator data to calculate a
total mass of gas and oil associated with this volume of production. Similarly
from the oil FVF and density, we can calculate the equivalent mass of this barrel
of oil at reservoir conditions. If the two masses are not very similar then there is
an inconsistency in the reported results which must be further investigated and
eliminated.
If all the data has been entered correctly, the program will show the masses
calculated for surface and reservoir plus the percentage difference between
them.
Gas In a similar way to that described for oils, the data from a gas or condensate can
be used to construct a mass balance between surface and reservoir.
Unfortunately, most condensate reports do not have enough information to do a
full balance. Instead the program uses the data entered and assumes the
masses are equal. With the data provided, it calculates a series of values for
gas FVF, density and molecular weight which can be validated against report or
EoS calculated numbers. Two gas FVFs and gravities are reported. The first or
dry value assumes that all the reservoir gas ends up as gas at surface. The real
value follows from the mass balance and takes into account the gas that turns to
condensate
Mode
Two calculation modes are available:
Validate After all the input parameters are entered, the program will compare the
mass calculated at surface with the mass calculated at reservoir level
Calculate This mode is useful if a key piece of Black Oil data is missing. Enter all
Missing the data as above and press calculate. The program will assume the
Value mass at surface and reservoir are equal and fill estimate the missing
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 457
value. If more than one piece of data is missing an error message will be
generated
This calculation performs a single point isoenthalpic flash from an initial pressure and
temperature condition.
Input fields
Stream A combo box is provided to select any stream within the PVTP file
When these values are entered and Calc is pressed, the program flashes the fluid at initial
conditions and finds the total enthalpy of the system.
The program then iterates the temperature and flashes at the new T and P until the total
enthalpy is within 0.01% of the initial value.
During iteration intermediate values are shown in the right hand side of the dialog.
When a successful match is found the process stops and the value is transferred to the
results panel at the bottom of the dialog.
Results fields
Command buttons
The aim of the utility is to predict the change in temperature if a fluid is moved from one
pressure to another adiabatically. The temperature change is due to thermodynamic effects
only as no heat is allowed to transfer to or from the system.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 459
Input fields
Data points This option defines how the range of final pressures to reach in the
isoenthalpic flash are entered . Two modes are available:
Streams A list is provided to select any stream within the PVTP file
Initial conditions The inputs to the dialog are:
Initial temperature
Initial Pressure
Command buttons
Calc Brings up the calculation dialog click on the Calc control button.
Cancel Cancel will clear all entries and return the user to the Summary Screen
Clear Delete all the entered input parameters
Steps to follow:
Auto Mode
1. Enter a Start Temperature and a Start Pressure.
2. Enter a minimum and maximum end pressure and the number of pressure values
required.
3. Press Calc.
The basis of the plot is that if log (KP) is plotted against a characteristic b function the
resultant values should approximate to a straight line.
Any gross deviations from this behaviour suggest that the X, Y combination for that
component is suspect.
A typical data entry and calculation dialog is shown below. This display is called by selecting
the Hoffmann Quality Plot option from the Utilities menu.
Normally the table is blank but if data is present the entire table values are automatically filled
in when the dialog is loaded.
The required entries are a set of matching vapour and liquid compositions at a known
temperature and pressure.
As each component percentage is entered a running total and remainder (100 - total) will be
displayed.
Mole fractions can also be entered. In this case, when Calc is hit the user will be prompted to
auto correct the values.
Where no value is available zero may be typed or a blank left. In the latter case the blank will
be written automatically as zero.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 461
When all component values have been entered, enter the temperature and pressure at which
the samples were taken.
Clicking on the Calc button will fill in the table as shown below.
Click on Plot to bring up the typical graph. The plot shown below uses a set of values from
the original paper.
It can be seen that the values follow a rough straight line. To help visualising this effect, the
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 463
The databases can therefore be made up of entirely new components or existing components
with some properties adjusted. The user database points are held within an ASCII file with a
UDB extension. The directory where these files are stored is saved within the PROSPER.ini
file. This directory can be set using the Set user database Directory button which calls the
user Database Directory Dialog 465 .
Once created, the databases can be used via the Select Components Dialog 189 .
If any *.UDB files exist their names will be displayed in the combo box provided. If the file has
been created with user data, but the specific UDB file is not on the users machine the
components will be listed within the user area for identification but cannot be extended or
This dialog is called from the Database Menu. The dialog allows the user to create an empty
user database file (extension. UDB) and go on to add components via the database edit and
database import dialogs.
A typical display is shown above:
See also
User Databases 463
Database Edit 466
Database Import 467
Selecting a Database Directory 465
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 465
This dialog is called from the Select Components dialog 189 and from the various user database
screens. The dialog shown below allows the user to brows for a directory where the user
database files (extension. UDB) reside.
Selecting Browse will display a directory selection tree. When the selection has been made
click on OK to store the data within the PROSPER.ini file.
See also
User Databases 463
Database Create 464
Database Edit 466
Database Import 467
His dialog is called from the Database Create Dialog 464 or from the Database Menu. The
feature allows the user to add or remove components from a user database. The properties
of each component can be adjusted manually or calculated. All the data is read from and
saved to an ASCII *.UDB file. A typical display is shown above.
The minimum amount of data required is a short name (16 characters), a long name (50
characters) and a molecular weight. The Fill in Values option will give reasonable values for
all missing data based on several criteria, starting with molecular weight. All fields can be
edited.
User
Database
This allows the user to select the database to be edited. The Set user
Database Directory 465 button brings up the user Database: Directory Dialog
which sets up where the file is stored. This area also contains a field which
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
User Guide 467
BPt.
Tc,Pc,Vc,
Omega These combo boxes allow the user to select which correlations are used to
determine the properties if required of the larger species within the database.
The same correlations are used within the Pseudo Properties Dialog 220
Exit and All changes are saved to the database file and the dialog is closed
Save
Cancel All changes are ignored and the dialog is closed
Clear All table entries are cleared
Fill In Values As indicated above this option allows the user to fill in any properties with reasonable
values based on the component's molecular weight etc.
Import This option brings up the Database Import Dialog 467 . Within this display the
Components user can select components from any other user database or from the
Petroleum Experts database to import into the database being constructed.
The properties can then be adjusted within the edit database dialog
See also
User Databases 463
Database Create 464
Database Import 467
Selecting a Database Directory 465
Within this display the user can select components from any other user database or from the
Petroleum Experts database to import 467 into the database being constructed. The
properties can then be adjusted within the Edit Database Dialog 466 .
A typical display would be as shown above.
The left hand area of the dialog allows the user to select any of the Petroleum Experts
components. To the right the user can call up any predefined user database and select
components for import. When all selections have been made click on Exit and Save to import
the values.
The Set user Database Directory 465 button brings up the user Database: Directory Dialog
which sets up where the file is stored.
See also:
User Databases 463
Database Create 464
Database Edit 466
Selecting a Database Directory 465
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Chapter
Examples Guide
470 PVTP
3 Examples Guide
3.1 Examples Index
The following table can be used as reference for the example included in this Guide.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 471
Note that this is only one of the possible routes followed, as in PVTP several other
paths can be followed by the more experienced users.
The steps followed here generates EOS with pure components untouched and volume shift
added (if necessary), therefore it is useful to achieve EOS that can be used in a process
simulator.
This help is available from the Help Menu on the main PVTP display.
See also
Condensed Guide 473
Step by Step Guide 475
Procedure for exporting Black Oil and EOS data 513
Procedure for importing components from other fluid characterisations 521
Decontamination Procedure 525
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 473
The following steps can be followed once all the required quality controls (like Mass Balance)
have been performed on the lab report data.
0. Enter the main program options introduce the Volume shift parameter by enabling it
in the main program options
1. Select Components (usually up to C6 and use a pseudo for the rest)
2. Enter Mole Percents
3. Use the Pseudo Props feature to enter the molecular weight and specific gravity of
the pseudo
4. Select the Density Method as Costald and use the Automatch button to regress on
the pseudo properties to get close to Costald densities
5. Just to be on the safe side, use the Quick Calc to do a flash to standard conditions
or a flash through separator stages and cross check GOR and densities from the
PVT report. This is to see what the program has matched the pseudo properties to
6. If the GOR and density do not match, the MW or specific gravity of the pseudo can
be changed by 5-10% to get close to the densities. Automatch every time to
preserve the match on the density at standard conditions.
Once a satisfactory match of the flash through separator stages is achieved, select
"Use Original Pseudo Props from Store", which will try and keep the existing
matching
7. Having checked the Automatch calculations, the phase envelope can now be created
from the Quick Calc again. Enter the Saturation pressure for a given temperature
from the report and see how far away the phase envelope is. If there is any
difference between the saturation pressure from the EOS and the test, later BI
coefficients will be used to make them consistent
8. From the Advanced Pseudo Splitting section select Whitson Method.
Access the Advanced section, then in the Preferences select the best property
databases. After that, change the Alpha factor and recalculate split until the
distribution of the pseudo components follows the trend as per composition (in case
this is not available, for example, if the C6 % was 2.5%, then the C7 component may
start from values slightly lower than 2.5%)
9. Select Split Number as 10 (or over) and then select Set Even Split to create the
pseudos. Automatch at the end
10. Use BI coefficients if necessary to increase the saturation pressure and match the
lab experimental saturation pressure. Care should be taken not to use the BI
coefficients too much since they can distort the phase envelope.
Use the Chevron model to calculate all the BI coefficients. If the model saturation
pressure is higher than the experimental, use the feature Set Max Value to and Set
Values to reduce the highest values and achieve the match of the saturation pressure
11. Enter lab data. Select the data to match using the Include/Exclude feature and set
the relative importance to the data to match using the weightings and Set Weighting
feature
12. Regress to get close to the match data. Set the mode to Tcs, Pcs, AFs with
Multiplier for each property. Regress on Pseudo components Tc and Pc, Volume
Shift and BI for all the pseudos
13. Verify the matching by performing with the EoS the various experiments from the lab
report to see how close the EOS is predicting the properties. If any of the
experimental data is not matched, add more weighting to it and regress again
See also
Step by Step Guides 472
Step by Step Guide 475
Procedure for exporting Black Oil and EOS data 513
Procedure for importing components from other fluid characterisations 521
Decontamination Procedure 525
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 475
Note that this is only one of the possible routes followed, as in PVTP several other
paths can be followed by the more experienced users.
All isomers e.g. nC4 and iC4 should be kept separate to allow identification and
separation in the process simulator
More pseudo components are used for all fluids. This gives more flexibility in pseudo
characterization and more component properties to match with. The surface simulation may
also require more heavy ends to model the separation processes effectively.
The Whitson Gamma distribution method for pseudo splitting will be used to modify the
pseudo components' distribution and reproduce the actual fluid distribution
Hysys or Unisim use the Costald method of oil density estimation as default. This is
available within PVTp as a direct comparison to the calculated
Equation of State value.
The lack of a blending function within the surface simulator may require the build up of a
composition which contains all the pseudos within the gathering network. This optional step
which uses the component import facility is included in this guide.
Automatch feature
Step 7 490 Find the Pseudo Distribution (Whitson Alpha Factor) and Split the Pseudo
Step 8 494 Use BI Coefficients to Improve Match on Saturation Pressure
Step 9 498 Select Match Parameters
Step 10 504 Use Regression to Match Fluid
Step 11 508 Check and Refine the Fluid Characterisation
Step 12 512 Calculate and Export
See also
Step by Step Guides 472
Condensed Guide 473
Procedure for exporting Black Oil and EOS data 513
Procedure for importing components from other fluid characterisations 521
Decontamination Procedure 525
or use icon
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 477
The program will default to the most commonly used combinations i.e.
If a different set of Units to Oilfield is used, access the Options/Units menu and select the
Units system from the drop-down menu, as shown below:
At this point it would also be useful to set the regression preferences to avoid the accidental
use of Pure Component properties Tc and Pc. From the file menu select Preferences .....
Calculation Options.
This will bring up the preferences dialog 156 . Select the Regression tab to see the display
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 479
shown below:
Select what parameters will be allowed. The chosen options can be saved as the default
values and will be selected for any new files created.
or use icon
1. Choose the required components by clicking on the names within the list box. Include all
isomers as they will be required by the surface simulation package.The number of
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 481
components depends on the application and the information available within the PVT report.
The Reservoir or Wellstream analysis will contain a list of components up to C6, C10, C12,
Cxx etc. The plus fraction should have associated with it a Molecular Weight and a Specific
Gravity. This information is required to characterize the Pseudo Component(s) in Step 5
Normally, selecting up to C6 and having a C7+ pseudo is enough for all oils and most
condensates. C7,C8,C9 etc. are mixtures of components with the same carbon number and
should really be treated as pseudos. Identifying them as pure components will fix their
properties and reduce the number of variables that might be used in the match. If no
Molecular Weight and a Specific Gravity is available within the report a methodology is
outlined within the program help to estimate these values.
More detail on alternative entries is given in the help for Component Selection 189 .
See the dialog help 193 for more details on the use of this feature.
3.2.2.4 Step 4: Enter Composition
Use Data|Enter Composition menu item
or use icon
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 483
Enter the composition in mole % from the Reservoir or Wellstream analysis for each
component (1) and pseudo component (2). A running total of the entries are displayed (3).
At this point reference data, especially the temperature at which the sample was taken,
should be entered in area (4). This temperature will be used to conduct the Saturation
Pressure calculations within Step 7
When all entries are complete click on Pseudo Props. (5) to move on to the next step.
At least one pseudo component should have been identified in step 3 479 . After the pseudo
percentage(s) have been entered in step 4 , click on the Pseudo Props. button to display to
bring up the important Pseudo Properties 220 Display
The purpose of this step is to give the pseudo component(s) an initial set of properties.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 485
The pseudo is the greatest unknown within the composition and is always composed of a
mixture of many compounds with a wide variety of individual properties. It is therefore, not
surprising that the characterisation of these compounds is the key area of EOS PVT
matching.
The starting values for Tc, Pc , AF etc. are obtained from correlations.
Normally the PVT report will give SG and Molecular Weight information for the plus
component.
Enter the values in the table (1) and select Calc Values (3)
At this point the correlations (4) will calculate a Boiling Point and use this with SG and Mwt.
to fill in the other properties (2).
The default correlations are Petroleum Experts for BPt. and Twu/Edminster for Tc, Pc , AF.
The correlation can be changed by using the combo boxes in area (4)
NOTE : The properties of the pseudo(s) will only be recalculated if the Boiling Point value for
that pseudo is blanked out.
The Properties mode (5) should normally be set at Automatic. Manual mode assumes the
user will type in all the properties.
When the initial properties are in place, the User should move on to step 6 486 for further
pseudo characterisation.
More detail on alternative entries is given in Pseudo Properties.
3.2.2.6 Step 6: Match the Surface Volumetric Properties (Density, GOR etc.) using
the Automatch feature
Automatching is the key to efficient fluid characterisation within the PVT Package
Background
The Equation of State model is not ,at present, predictive. This weakness leads to the need
for extensive fluid matching.
In addition, the model is particularly poor at estimating liquid densities.
The combination of these factors leads to an overall picture of an equation with many
variables ,many component properties and therefore many routes to matching a complex fluid
over a range of pressures and temperatures. If an efficient route is not taken, it can be very
difficult to resolve the overall picture especially with regard to reservoir and separator
densities.
Since all volumetric oil properties FVF GOR etc. are derived from density it is critical that this
area is accurately modelled.
What is Automatching
Within the PVT package two liquid densities 116 are calculated by two different methods. The
first is based on an empirical correlation from Standing and Katz or Costald. The second is
calculated from the Equation of State 91 liquid compressibility.
Experience has shown that the correlation value is always fairly close to the measured density
at surface conditions.
The Automatch process involves a series of flashes at 60 degrees F and 1 atm with an
adjustment to the pseudo properties after each flash. The aim is to bring the EOS density in
line with that calculated by the correlation. The boiling point (s) of the pseudo(s) are adjusted
after each iteration and the other properties recalculated using the new value.
Figure 1 illustrates the result of Automatch on a typical oil
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 487
The effect of Automatching is to move the lower end of the phase envelope into a realistic
area giving close to the correct values for separator oil density GOR FVF etc.. The matching
of this area becomes minimal ,allowing the overall regression to move more smoothly to a
solution. In general, the top end of the phase envelope is little changed for oils during
Automatch . The process of finding the best Alpha factor described in Step 7 includes an
Automatch stage
3.2.2.6.1 Automatch
How to Automatch
Automatching is a very straightforward process. Enter the Pseudo Properties 220 dialog as
described in Step 5 484 .
Simply select the density model to which the EoS oil density is to be compared (1), Standing-
Katz or Costald, and click on the Automatch button (2).
3.2.2.6.2 Initial QC
Once the Automatch has been used, it is possible to verify that the EOS is heading towards
the right direction by verifying for example the the access the Quick Calc and run the flash to
STD to through Separator Stages:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 489
And then Calc, enter the same separator stages' P and T conditions as in the lab report and
Calc again:
It is possible to compare the GOR and the Oil Density at the Standard Conditions stage.
If the value are close enough (in the case above the density is 1% off, which is not bad as a
starting point, as well as the GOR is around 5% off the lab data, which is also not too far),
then one can go to the next step, otherwise one way to get a good starting point is to:
go back to the Pseudo Component entry screen, modify the Mw and/or the S.G of the
pseudo
Automatch again and
The-check with Quick Calc
This is because Mw and S.G. are properties that are affected by a certain tolerance. In any
case as a rule of thumb, one can set a maximum change of 10% to these parameters.
Storing the Pseudo is important, as later, if necessary, it is possible to reset the Pseudo and
follow a different strategy to match the lab report.
Also, enable the option "Use Original Pseudo Props from Store 230 ". This will try and match
the liquid density at STD to the same Costald or Standing-Katz density determined on the
basis of the Stored pseudo component.
This option is useful to make sure to reproduce the same density at STD as the one that has
been found at the beginning of the matching process, no matter if the pseudo component is
split.
3.2.2.7 Step 7: Find the Best Pseudo Distribution (Whitson Alpha Factor)_2
The aim of this step is to assist the package to smoothly get as close as possible to the fluid
saturation pressure and separator volumetrics without matching.
When Step 6 is complete the Pseudo Properties dialog will look like this:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 491
Select the Splitting Method to be Whitson (area 1) and click on the Advanced splitting button
(area 2).
Background to the Whitson method can be found in Pseudo Component Splitting within the
modeling section. The shape factor alpha offers many alternative shapes to the expanded
component distribution.
This will call the Advanced Splitting dialog as shown below:
Select the databases for the Extended Properties as Whitson, as shown below:
After that, modify the Alpha factor and select Recalculate Split until the C7 % is such as to
follow the physical trend from the previous component C6.
For example, in this case the C6 molar percentage is 2.81%, hence the molar composition of
C7 should start from slightly below this value.
In this case a Alpha of 1.2 will give a composition of C7 of 2.6%, which is fine:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 493
From the right hand side of the screen enter a number of pseudos equal to 10 (or more) and
select Set Even Split:
Then Automatch. Check with Quick Calc the Flash Through Separator Stages to make sure
GOR and Oil Density at standard are reasonably reproduced (see Initial QC 488 ).
NOTE: The whole point of this initial adjustment is to come up to a Pseudo component
definition that drives the EOS towards the right direction. Therefore it is not important
to match all the properties perfectly at the beginning. In later stage the EOS will be fine
tuned to match the whole lab report.
When the check is complete click on Exit and Save within the Advanced Splitting dialog to
return to the Pseudo Properties dialog. Click on Exit and Save to return to the Enter
Composition dialog. Now proceed with Step 8 494 .
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 495
Select the method of calculation for both Pure Components and Pseudos as the Chevron
method and select Calculate New Values:
Check in Quick Calc the Phase Envelope. Enter Set Test Pts from the buttons available to
define the experimental saturation pressure (in this case 200 deg F, 2330 psig):
If the saturation pressure as per EOS exceeds the test data, like in the situation below:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 497
Then go back to the previous screen and set Set Max Value to a certain value and then Set
Values in order to reduce the highest values in the table (note that the BI between the C1 and
the heaviest components are the ones with the biggest effect) and match the saturation
pressure:
In the example a Max value of 0.03 was used and this is the predicted saturation pressure:
After steps 7 and 8 the EOS is now reproducing separator experiment and saturation
pressure and is ready for the final matching.
See Binary Interaction Coefficients 216 Dialog for more detail on the options available.
NOTE
With the limitations of not using pure component properties in this route it may not be possible
to fully match all the important lab data. Engineering judgment may be required to guide the
program to the best match for the fluid within its application.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 499
Assume the example is a gas condensate. It is fairly straightforward to match the reservoir
conditions i.e. Zgas ,PSat, in isolation. This will give a model which works reliably in the match
area. However , the non-predictive nature of the EOS and its weakness towards material
balance means that this matching does not give valid results as the pressure changes rising
up the wellbore to separator conditions. Liquid dropout and Separator GOR etc. become very
suspect.
Similarly, the separator area can be well matched in isolation , but this model would not be
valid if used to predict reservoir properties.
Treating the areas separately essentially describes two different models for the same fluid.
The constant mass expansion going from well to surface cannot be resolved. The error this
approach causes can be very significant and will come out in many ways e.g. in the inability to
resolve reserves with production.
To avoid such problems we recommend that reservoir and separator matching must always
be done together Densities or density derived data must be included for reservoir and
surface to force a material balance on the system.
NOTE The EOS calculation initially calculates Zliquid and Zvapour. Densities are calculated
directly from the Zs. Matching Z matches density
or use icon
This will bring up the match table dialog. This consists of a series of tables one for each
measurement/calculation.
Any cell can be filled in with data. Blanks are allowed where data is not available or
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 501
unreliable.
Make sure all pressure steps are entered for SEP(Separator), CVD(Constant Volume
Depletion for gas condensate fluids) or Differential Liberation (for oils)
The figures below illustrate the data used for a real oil example.
Saturation Pressure
This information is reported usually separately in the report or in the CCE experiment data.
If it exists, it is better to enter a density at saturation pressure in this table.
The oil viscosity and density have been entered. Note that the viscosity is kept as such (the
viscosity points reproduce the viscosity profile with pressure), whilst for the time being the Oil
Density values have been Excluded, as a value of the density of oil at saturation pressure is
already included in PSAT.
To Exclude point, select the corresponding cells and select Exclude. In the same way,
weighting cab be defined (select the cell, select the value of the weighting and click on Set
Weighting).
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 503
Note that all separator stages have been included as the final oil density depends on the path
to Stock Tank conditions.. With multiple stage separators it is best to match first on the main
stage.In the case above the GOR from the second stage has been excluded.
Note that the GOR from the 1st stage has been set to a medium Weighting, as the GOR as
property is affected by a bigger measurement uncertainty.
When GOR numbers are much smaller in the subsequent stages, it is unlikely that these
values are as accurate. We suggest to exclude them of that a lower weighting. eg. 3 is given
to these numbers. see help on Match Data Tables for Weighting and Inclusion/Exclusion.
When all entries are complete click on OK to move on to the next step.
One important parameter characterizing gas condensate fluids is the Liquid Dropout, coming
from CCE and/or CVD experiments.
The CVD process also includes all stages including the start point at the saturation pressure
value. Missing out any stage will alter the values for all stages below it. The CVD dropout
curve should only be modeled if the values have been experimentally determined. Be aware
that many recent values are the result of a modeling process with the errors that may involve.
NOTE: for CCE dropout the values expected are relative to the volume at step not the
volume at reservoir volume . Most PVT reports give dropout relative to reservoir. To convert
the values divide the dropout figure by the relative volume at each pressure step.
The alternative is to match on the PSAT liquid dropout and the relative volume. It is our
experience that the latter course is more difficult and does not produce the same quality of
match.
There are many ways to approach dropout matching and no best way to do it. One thing to
keep in mind is that the values are not as accurately measured as density or saturation
pressure. For that reason the values should all be given a lower weighting e.g. 3. This
prevents important numbers like PSAT moving to help dropout to match. It is also better not
to start with all values included in the match. Give the program 2 or 3 representative points,
match to them and view the result. If required include more points until a reasonable match is
produced. See help on Match Data Tables 267 for Weighting and Inclusion/Exclusion
3.2.2.10 Step 10: Use Regression to Match Fluid
Click on Data|Regression menu item
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 505
or use icon
Regression is a two stage process. In the first, the user must select which calculations should
be matched.
Selecting regression brings up the dialog illustrated below:
Each column within the match table (Step 9 498 ) has an equivalent checkbox within this dialog.
Note that the Data Match Model is set to Tcs and Pcs with Multiplier on Each Property.
This mode ensures the physical trend of the properties is preserved.
It is recommended that all calculations with the exception of any liquid dropout or GRAD
variables should be selected at once.
The total selected is displayed (area 1) Every calculation can be given a high , medium or low
weighting which changes its contribution to the overall error (area 2).
In the case above, the GOR from separator has been set to Medium Weighting.
Unless the match value is suspect or of lower accuracy , the weighting should be left as high.
When the calculations have been selected, click on Regress... (area 3) to move on to the
next stage
Generalising a regression strategy is difficult, however the tool allows to follow different paths
to achieve a realistic matching.
Initially select all the pseudo Pcs, Tcs and all the components' volume shift. In addition, select
the matching of the binary interaction coefficients applying the same multiplier to all pseudos.
See also What Properties to Use in Regression and Matching Viscosities 498 for more
information.
Click on Regress to initiate the matching calculations. The process stops when a maximum
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 507
number of steps has been passed or the error term CHI falls to below 1e-09.The process can
be restated if not enough steps have been taken.
When the first round regression has been completed more variables can be added and the
process repeated.
At the end of the regression it is possible to view the parameters of the EOS and to Plot the
Tcs and Pcs:
To view the plots, select Plot and then in the Variables menu in the Plot area select Critical
Pressure and Critical Temperature:
If after the validation the matching to the lab report data is not satisfactory, add more
parameters to the regression, or start again from step 5 484 defining a higher number of
pseudos, and re-start the process.
For example, to verify the oil density from CCE run the CCE experiment in the same
Temperature and Pressure conditions as the lab tests:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 509
Calculate and Plot. Each variable can be selected from the Variables menu in the Plot area:
The same can be done for the saturation pressure and the separator experiment.
PSAT calculation:
Separator calculation:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 511
The validation above can be used to ensure that EOS matches properly the most
important PVT properties.
If an oil or condensate does not readily match using the method outlined here , our experience
has been that in many cases detailed investigation of the reported data has shown an
inconsistency. The error normally lies in the area of sampling and handling .
Compositional Gradient
Matching a compositional gradient 113 to fix a pressure or other variable with depth can be
done See Match Data Tables 267 for more information. This calculation is very important if a
significant gradient is anticipated or if there is a gas - oil contact within the reservoir If
modeling is to be done successfully, it is recommended that at least two sampled points
should be available within the oil leg.
The reason for this suggestion is that the gradient is a function of fluid density The variability in
oil density with depth may not be well enough characterised with only one match point
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 513
It is only possible to export black oil data in Eclipse file format for
instance from a characterized EOS. The black oil calculator can
be used if desired to calculate black oil properties for a given
range of pressures and temperatures.
The meaning of the PVT input properties for a black oil model is illustrated in the following
figure and in the comments below:
Where:
The oil gravity is by definition the ratio between the density of the oil and the water both at
STD.
The Impurities correspond to the mole % of CO2, N2 and H2S in the gas liberated in the
process shown above.
The formula above can be used to reduce a train of n separators to an equivalent one stage.
The tables are obtained by running a flash experiment (CCE) corrected by the separator train
used to determine the basic inputs.
The tables can be used as match data for the analytical black oil correlations or used as such
as Tables in IPM.
located in the main screen of PVTP. After that at the top right corner select the button BOil
Properties as shown below:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 515
This will access the Black Oil Properties screen, which allows the user to read the basic input
data for the black oil model:
These values can be then entered in IPM (PROSPER, MBAL, GAP, REVEAL) as input data for
the black oil model.
At the bottom of the screen one can enter the separator train used as path to standard. Press
Calc to re-calculate the properties.
With regards to the gas impurities, access the More button and read directly the molar
fraction of the impurities in the accumulated gas stream:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 517
On this screen select the Export File Type 4 and hit OK. This takes to the next screen, where
the table pressures and temperature is defined as shown below:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 519
As the table contains GOR and oil FVF information as well, the user needs to define a
separator train for this case consistent with the path to STD chosen as reference.
In this example the same separator train as see above 579 . To do so on the above screen, click
on Separator conditions and select Use separator train then click on the Set up button to
specify the separator conditions:
On this screen enter the separator scheme. Once this is done click on OK and this takes back
to the Export screen shown below. On this hit Calc. Table button. If more than one table is
selected for export, hit Calc. all. This populates the table with PVT data as shown below.
Once the table is filled, on the right hand side press MBAL select (this format is used by
MBAL and REVEAL, otherwise select PROSPER if the data are to exported to PROSPER).
This selects the columns to be exported.
On this click on Export and it will come up with the following dialog:
On this screen select All Tables. Click on Export and it takes to the following screen, where
we can save a *.ptb file, which can be read by Petroleum Experts applications.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 521
The .ptb file can be then imported in the Match data sections of PROSPER, MBAL or
REVEAL using the devoted Import functions.
Enter the name for the file and save it as a *.prp file which can be imported directly into any of
the programs of the IPM Suite.
The options available for the pseudos within this system are:
1) To keep them the same
2) To blend them
3) To keep them separate
If 3) is the desired option it is necessary to produce compositions which look like those below
The matched composition A contains pseudos from B and vice versa. The imported
components are initially set to zero and gain value as the fluids mix within the network. This
effect can be easily achieved by using the Composition Editor 208 Import function.
The display which is used for composition editing is shown below. This screen can be called
by clicking on the Composition Editor option within the Data menu:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 523
Components may be imported from a stream within this file or from any PVTP file.
Select the source from the top list box. The user can then choose to select from any
component within the stream or only from the pseudo components. If the latter option is
selected, the Component Import Select 214 dialog will be loaded with all pseudos selected.
This dialog is called from the Composition Editor 208 import component option. The example
shown has been selected as all pseudos from the Component Import 214 dialog. Components
can be selected by clicking on the name within the list box or on the line numbers within the
table. A label can be used to identify the source of the component. This can be added as a
prefix or suffix. When the selections have been made click on the Import button to return to
the composition editor dialog.
See also
Step by Step Guides 472
Condensed Guide 473
Step by Step Guide 475
Procedure for exporting Black Oil and EOS data 513
Decontamination Procedure 525
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 525
The object of this exercise is to identify the effects of a contaminant within a fluid and to
remove this contamination in a controlled manner.
What should be available is
the characteristics of the contaminated fluid i.e. a PVT report
an extended analysis of the contaminated fluid and
an estimate of what the fluid composition would be without the contaminant
STEP by STEP
The procedure consists of matching to the known characteristics with a split history which
reflects the addition of the contaminant.
This is done by using the Split Profile feature.
Matching gives the properties of the pseudo components and the split history identifies how
they were put together.
In the decontamination display the program breaks the matched fluid back down into the many
split parts along with compositions and properties associated with each part.
The user can then set the compositions to that of the uncontaminated fluid. When this is done
the program adjusts the compositions and properties to reflect the change and recombines
the split parts to workable pseudo components.
This new working composition can be used to generate data for an uncontaminated model.
STEP 1. Follow the Step by Step Guide until step 6 486 . A single C7+ pseudo component
should be sufficient for most fluids.
STEP 2. Enter the pseudo component MWt and SG. within the Pseudo Properties page
and click on the Advanced button within the Split/Profile area at the bottom of the display.
STEP 3. Within the Advanced Splitting Dialog tick the box Follow Profile method using the
combo box provided above the table. Click on the Setup Split Profile button.
STEP 4. Within the Split Profile Dialog enter the detailed composition of the contaminated
fluid. Only the areas of strong contamination are required. The program will fill in the rest
with a standard distribution (for example, Whitson). Click on Exit and Save.
STEP 5. Back within the Advanced Splitting dialog click on Recalculate Split to implement
the profile.
STEP 6. Complete these operations and verify the new distribution by selecting Plot:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 527
STEP 7. The Stream now contains a set of partly matched pseudo components with a full
history of how they were put together. Continue to fully match this fluid as described in the
Step by Step Guide (from step 7 490 onward keeping the option Follow Profile on).
STEP 8. When fully matched, select Decontaminate from the Data menu. This brings up
the Decontamination Control Dialog.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 529
Route 2 532 . Entering the contaminant composition and using it to decontaminate the
sample
See also
Step by Step Guides 472
Condensed Guide 473
Step by Step Guide 475
Procedure for exporting Black Oil and EOS data 513
Procedure for importing components from other fluid characterisations 521
STEP 9. Enter the estimated values for the composition of the un-contaminated fluid in the
New Mole% column.
This can be derived from the amount and composition of the contaminant and the original
composition of the contaminated sample. Only the area of obvious contamination needs to
be entered. Click on Plot to view the results. Click on the Quick Look button to view the
effects of these entries. this option creates a temporary stream containing the
decontaminated fluid.
STEP 10. To complete the decontamination process click on Decontaminate. The Output
Selection Dialog which appears allows to select between using the existing stream or
creating a new one. It would normally be better to create a new version as it allows the
starting point to be kept for comparison and future reference.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 531
STEP 11. On returning to the Decontamination Control Dialog the display will contain
information on the results of the decontamination.
The decontamination calculation proceeds as follows:
The individual component mole percents are set equal to the New Mole% values , where
defined.
The remaining component mole percents are adjusted to make up the 100% total and to
follow the trend of the original values.
The new full composition appears as the Cald. %.
The Calcd% are used in conjunction with the initial properties to generate a new set of
properties for each component and a combined version for each of the pseudo
components. The pseudo component start and end values can be seen by clicking on the
View/Change button.
The trend in the individual compositions can be seen by using the Plot button.
STEP 12. The decontamination procedure is now complete. Click on Exit and Save and
then File|Save to store the results.
STEP 13. An effort should be made to confirm the accuracy of the fluid model against any
other known properties of the reservoir fluid eg. field separator data when it becomes
available or the reservoir fluid density from RFT measurements.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 533
Click on the Quick Look button to view the effects of these entries. this option creates a
temporary stream containing the decontaminated fluid.
STEP 10. To complete the decontamination process click on Decontaminate. The Output
Selection Dialog which appears allows to select between using the existing stream or
creating a new one. It would normally be better to create a new version as it allows the
starting point to be kept for comparison and future reference.
STEP 11. On returning to the Decontamination Control Dialog the display will contain
information on the results of the decontamination.
The pseudo component start and end values can be seen by clicking on the View/Change
button.
The trend in the individual compositions can be seen by using the Plot button.
STEP 12. The decontamination procedure is now complete. Click on Exit and Save and
then File|Save to store the results.
STEP 13. An effort should be made to confirm the accuracy of the fluid model against any
other known properties of the reservoir fluid eg. field separator data when it becomes
available or the reservoir fluid density from RFT measurements.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 535
3.3.1.1 Objectives
A full lab analysis has been carried out on a recombined oil sample and a lab report is
available for the fluid.
The objective is to use the PVT Package to build an equation of state (EOS) model for an oil
sample.
Learning topics
To familiarise the user with building EOS models in PVTP.
To use PVTP to calibrate the EOS models to measured laboratory experiments.
To generate PVT tables for various applications.
Executive Summary
This example will take the user through the following steps:
See also
Condensed Guide 473
Step by Step Guides 472
3.3.1.2 Data Available
The sampling was carried out in the field by means of a test separator. Bottles containing gas
and liquid were taken and sent to the lab for further analysis.
The oil and gas were recombined physically in the lab to reproduce the measured producing
GOR. Then the recombined sample underwent a complete set of lab experiments, herewith
reported:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 537
ptions | Options and then ensure that the Peng Robinson EOS is chosen and the Volume Shift
enabled:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 539
This is because the EOS as a model is a relationship between P, V and T and is not based on
mass balance, therefore mass balance has to be inferred in the EOS through matching. In
other words, the EOS has to be matched to lab data that respect the mass balance.
If the report is consistent, one kilogram of fluid at the saturation condition should give one
kilogram of oil plus gas at the surface condition, considering the separator path described in
the report.
The objective is to validate the PVT report Black Oil data, by checking the mass balance and
to achieve that the Mass Balance Calculator 454 Utility in PVTP will be used.
3.3.1.4.1 Run Mass Balance Calculator
At this point it is possible to perform the mass balance QC of the report data
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 541
Notes:
- In the Reservoir section enter the density at saturation and the oil FVF at saturation. These
two will give the mass downhole per STB of oil at surface.
Note that in the Reservoir field theoretically one could enter density and oil FVF (from flash) at
any conditions above the bubble point. However, in reality only the oil FVF at saturation is
explicitly reported.
- In the Separator Train section all the separator stages before the last Standard Condition
(STD) stage should be entered
- In the Stock Tank section the data concerning the Standard Condition stage should be
entered. Note that in the case of this sample no gas is liberated at STD, therefore 0 GOR is
entered. The Gas Gravity has no effect, as no gas is present, therefore any value can be
entered here.
Step 3. Calculate
Click the "Calc" button to compute the mass balance. The "% Difference" reported on the right
of the screen (highlighted in the figure above) reflects the difference between the mass of the
fluid at reservoir condition and the mass of the oil and gas that evolved out of it at surface
condition.
The difference is around 0.03%, which is acceptable. This validates the PVT report.
Note:
In the QC was not passed, then the lab would need to be contacted in order to shed light on
the reason of the mass discrepancy.
To select components in the screen shown below click on the desired components. The
selected ones will be highlighted. Once finished the pure component selection, enter the
number of pseudo-components in the top right hand corner of the screen (highlighted below).
Then select Enter Composition.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 543
ii) The characterisation can begin with one pseudo, which will be split
later if necessary.
On the right of this screen, the reservoir conditions i.e., pressure temperature and depth at
which the sample is taken is also entered.
The specific gravity entered here is 0.858 and the molecular weight is 228. It is possible to
use this information and some correlations (Petroleum Experts for Boiling Point and TWU/
Edmister for Tc. Pc, Vc and omega) to determine the remaining properties of the Pseudo
Component.
This is achieved by using the Calc Values 227 button. The result of this is that the properties
Tc. Pc, etc. of the Pseudo component are populated:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 545
Step 4. Automatch
The "Auto Match" button can be used to modify the Pseudo component properties and
regress on them in order to match the density at standard conditions from either Standing
Katz or Costald (selected in the Density Method). The EOS will not predict the right densities
on its own at standard conditions so by matching it to correlations ensures a good start to the
matching process.
In the case of this example the EOS will have to be suitable to a process simulation
tool, that is why the Costald correlation will be selected.
i) Experience has shown that the liquid densities predicted by Standing and Katz or
Costald methods are fairly close to the measured density under atmospheric
conditions, as these methods are based on the conservation of mass.
ii) During Auto Match, we iterate on the Heavy end parameters until the EOS
predicted density at surface is equal to the Standing and Katz density calculated
at surface.
iii) This usually provides a good starting point for calibrating the EOS models further.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 547
The lab report saturation pressure is 3540 psia. As the EOS is giving a lower saturation
pressure, it is possible to get closer to the saturation pressure by splitting the pseudo
component or adding BI coefficients. In the next steps this will be done by using the Whitson
Advanced Splitting Method 238 and the BI coefficient.
The same indication can be obtained by running the Phase Envelope calculation.
Hit on Calc. On the phase envelope screen popping up, select the "Set Test Pts." button to
enter the saturation pressure.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 549
After that, depending on the flash to STD data available, run the Quick Calc for Flash to STD
or through Separator Stages.
In this case the data available concern separator experiment.
Comparing these results with the lab report 536 , it is possible to see that the GOR and the Oil
Density at STD are very close.
The objective of this first part of the EOS matching is to get an EOS close enough to the real
fluid in order to reduce the amount of regression necessary later. Therefore, even larger
differences in the GOR and density obtained can be acceptable at this stage.
Howewer, if a tighter match is desired:
go back to the Pseudo Component entry screen, modify the Mw and/or the S.G of the
pseudo
Automatch again and
The-check with Quick Calc and repeat the process until the GOR and oil density are
closely matched.
Once a satisfactory separator test is achieved, Store the pseudo component properties by
clicking on Store in the Pseudo Component screen.
Also, enable the option "Use Original Pseudo Props from Store 230 ". This will try and match
the liquid density at STD to the same Costald or Standing-Katz density determined on the
basis of the Stored pseudo component.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 551
This can be achieved by applying the Whitson Advanced Pseudo Splitting Method.
The Whitson 238 methodology consists of determining a distribution for the Pseudo component
such as to get the EoS closer to the final matching.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 553
In the case of this example the % of C6 is 2.23%. By entering Alpha equal to 1.2 will get the
C7 % slightly less than the % of C6, making sure to follow the trend of molar percent.
If the detailed composition is available in the PVT report, one could modify the Alpha factor in
order to reproduce the actual components' variation.
After that select Exit and Save and Automatch. This is the situation at the moment:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 555
Saturation Pressure:
The saturation pressure is still below target, which means that BI coefficients will have to be
used.
It is possible to verify that a close matching is achieved instead for the separator train
experiment.
If this was not satisfactory, the Pseudo needs to be Restored and the Splitting repeated.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 557
Select BI Coeffs, make use the Chevron Method is selected and then Calc Values:
After that, check with Quick Calc the Phase envelope to verify the match on the only
saturation pressure available:
The match is pretty good. One can also verify that the separator train experiment is fine
again.
At this point it is possible validate with Exit and Save and pass to the next stage of
matching.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 559
The next step is to make sure that all the other important properties included in the lab report
are matched and to achieve that the EOS parameters Tc and Pc of the pseudo components,
BI coefficients and eventually volume shift will be regressed upon.
The next steps are:
A series of tab screens will be displayed, where the data concerning each experiment can be
entered.
With regards to the lab data to enter, refer to the lab report in the Data Available 536 section.
Enter the known data in the relevant sections as shown:
PSAT contains the information about the saturation pressure and density of the oil at
saturation. In this case the data concerning PSAT will come from the CCE report data.
To enter the CCE click on the CCE tab that appears on the screen shown above and this
takes to the next screen, where the data is entered.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 561
Similarly enter the separator experiment data under SEP tab in the lab data screen as shown
(only the GORs and oil density are entered):
Once the data is entered, select the data points that will be used in calibration. This can be
achieved by using the Include/Exclude and the Weighting features in the Match Data screen.
According to the Step by Step Guide, the minimum set of data required are:
Saturation Pressure
Density at saturation
GOR from separator
Density of oil at Standard Conditions
Viscosity (from CCE)
The first step to take is to disable some data points in CCE measurements. To do so in the
Match Data section select the CCE data tab as shown.
On this select the column of oil density and oil FVF by holding the down the mouse and
dragging across the cells to disable. This selects the cells. Once the cells are selected, click
on Exclude. This disables the data, i.e. the data will not be used for matching.
The properties are then greyed-out, sign that they have been excluded.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 563
The same is done for the GOR measured at the second stage separator and stock tank
conditions. Also for the GOR from the first stage can be set to a lower weighting by selecting
the cell containing the value of the GOR, selecting the Weighting (3) and clicking on Set
Weighting:
ii) A good model with predictive capabilities should use the minimum data to
calibrate and should predict other measured data reasonably well.
Once the properties that need to be matched against are selected, click OK to get out of lab
data entry screen.
3.3.1.5.4 Regression
The next step is to run a Regression by adjusting the pseudo components' Tc and Pc and BI
coefficient and Volume Shift .
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 565
In the Data Match Model field select Mode 4 - Tcs Pcs AFs with Multiplier on Each Property.
After that, in the Data to Match area select all the properties available (for the moment the Oil
viscosity is kept aside).
Then Regress. During the Regression pay attention to the Best error: this should be as small
as possible.
If the error does not decrease, just Cancel the Regression and retry following a different
route starting from the definition of the Pseudo component.
Also, in general it is indispensable to wait until the end of the 200 default iterations.
When to stop depends on the case. In general the Best error should be as close to
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 567
zero as possible. In most cases it is possible to stop and then pass to the final
verification and check how the various properties have been matched.
Once the regression is done, there automatically appears the following screen showing the
tuned properties of all the components.
This plot can be used to visualise how Tc and Pc of the pseudos have been changed (use the
Variables menu to enable the viewing of both Tc and Pc properties).
On this screen, click on Exit and Save. It takes back to the regression screen. On this screen
click on "Exit" and save and it takes back to the regression data selection screen.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 569
Then in the Matching screen select all the components' Vc. All the components can be
selected, as a correlation (Lohrenz Bray Clark) is used:
Regress and then Exit and Save and Main to go back to the main panel.
Step 1. PSAT
Access the menu Calculation / Saturation Pressure, enter the temperature for which to
calculate the saturation pressure):
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 571
Step 3. CCE
Access the menu Calculation/Constant Composition Expansion, then enter the ranges of
temperature and pressure according to the lab report and enter the separator train data (as
the Oil FVF will be compared, the same separator train as used in the lab must be used):
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 573
If oil FVF and GOR etc, need to be compared, the separator scheme
needs to be entered. If one leaves it blank all the GOR and FVF values
reported in the simulated experiment assume single stage atmospheric
flash. In the former case the option is selected from the Separator
calculator method drop down box
Click on Calc and Calc and then Plot from the results screen. Choose the variables from the
variables menu and observe the oil density computed using the matched Equation of State .
Also, it is possible to verify that the Oil FVF (not included in the matching) is matched quite
well:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 575
Step 4. Separator
Running the separator experiment in the same conditions as the test data, it is possible to
observe a very good agreement with the lab data:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 577
(Note: to view the oil density and GOR results at the same time, the Layout button has been
used to change the layout of the table)
Note that if the EOS is not reproducing adequately any of the properties, one can review the
matching process by adding more data to the regression, like for example the oil density from
CCE, or repeat the whole matching process (by restarting from the Pseudo component
definition 541 ).
It is only possible to export black oil data in Eclipse file format for
instance from a characterized EOS. The black oil calculator can
be used if desired to calculate black oil properties for a given
range of pressures and temperatures.
The meaning of the PVT input properties for a black oil model is illustrated in the following
figure and in the comments below:
Where:
The oil gravity is by definition the ratio between the density of the oil and the water both at
STD.
The Impurities correspond to the mole % of CO2, N2 and H2S in the gas liberated in the
process shown above.
The formula above can be used to reduce a train of n separators to an equivalent one stage.
The tables are obtained by running a flash experiment (CCE) corrected by the separator train
used to determine the basic inputs.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 579
The tables can be used as match data for the analytical black oil correlations or used as such
as Tables in IPM.
located in the main screen of PVTP. After that at the top right corner select the button BOil
Properties as shown below:
This will access the Black Oil Properties screen, which allows the user to read the basic input
data for the black oil model:
These values can be then entered in IPM (PROSPER, MBAL, GAP, REVEAL) as input data for
the black oil model.
At the bottom of the screen one can enter the separator train used as path to standard. Press
Calc to re-calculate the properties.
With regards to the gas impurities, access the More button and read directly the molar
fraction of the impurities in the accumulated gas stream:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 581
On this screen select the Export File Type 4 and hit OK. This takes to the next screen, where
the table pressures and temperature is defined as shown below:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 583
As the table contains GOR and oil FVF information as well, the user needs to define a
separator train for this case consistent with the path to STD chosen as reference.
In this example the same separator train as see above 579 . To do so on the above screen, click
on Separator conditions and select Use separator train then click on the Set up button to
specify the separator conditions:
On this screen enter the separator scheme. Once this is done click on OK and this takes back
to the Export screen shown below. On this hit Calc. Table button. If more than one table is
selected for export, hit Calc. all. This populates the table with PVT data as shown below.
Once the table is filled, on the right hand side press MBAL select (this format is used by
MBAL and REVEAL, otherwise select PROSPER if the data are to exported to PROSPER).
This selects the columns to be exported.
On this click on Export and it will come up with the following dialog:
On this screen select All Tables. Click on Export and it takes to the following screen, where
we can save a *.ptb file, which can be read by Petroleum Experts applications.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 585
The .ptb file can be then imported in the Match data sections of PROSPER, MBAL or
REVEAL using the devoted Import functions.
Enter the name for the file and save it as a *.prp file which can be imported directly into any of
the programs of the IPM Suite.
This takes to the following screen. On this screen, select the type of black oil tables that are
needed.
i) First define the type of phase tables. In this case select oil with
dissolved gas, the gas being dry and no water type tables.
ii) Based on the phase types selected, applicable keyword Options
become available. The keywords used are PVTO and PVDG for this
example.
Once the proper options are selected, click on Import. This takes to the following screen,
where the user can define the pressure and temperature range for which the tables need to
be generated.
Define also the separator scheme that will be used to calculate the GOR and oil FVF values.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 587
Once the data is input, click on Export and it takes to the following screen, where the tables
are displayed. Click on Calculate to populate the tables.
Click on Export on the populated tables and it takes to the Save screen as shown below.
Save the table as a *.inc file, which can be used by Eclipse. Click on PVT Main to come back
to the main screen.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 589
3.3.2.1 Objectives
A full lab analysis has been carried out on a downhole gas retrograde condensate sample and
a lab report is available for the fluid.
The objectives is to use the PVT Package to build an equation of state (EOS) model for a
gas sample.
Learning topics
To familiarise the user with building EOS models in PVTP.
To use PVTP to calibrate the EOS models to measured laboratory experiments.
To perform hydrate studies on the condensate sample
Executive Summary
This example will take the user through the following steps:
2. Simulate Experiments
Perform hydrate formation study
Work out hydrate inhibitor concentrations.
See also
Condensed Guide 473
Step by Step Guides 472
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 591
A multi stage separator experiment performed on the reservoir fluid resulted in the following
results:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 593
To select components in the screen shown below click on the desired components. The
selected ones will be highlighted. Once finished the pure component selection, enter the
number of pseudo-components in the top right hand corner of the screen (highlighted below).
Then select Enter Composition.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 595
Note that according to the lab data, the C4 and C5 are defined as such, without distinction
between the iso- and the n- alkane
On the right of this screen, the reservoir conditions i.e., pressure temperature and depth at
which the sample is taken is also entered.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 597
The specific gravity entered here is 0.77 and the molecular weight is 141. It is possible to use
this information and some correlations (Petroleum Experts for Boiling Point and TWU/
Edmister for Tc. Pc, Vc and omega) to determine the remaining properties of the Pseudo
Component.
This is achieved by using the Calc Values 227 button. The result of this is that the properties
Tc. Pc, etc. of the Pseudo component are populated.
In this case the default correlations have been used, however, in many cases it can be
beneficial to try and use different correlations, as mentioned in the Hints on Method 230
topic of the user Guide.
Step 4. Automatch
The "Auto Match" button can be used to modify the Pseudo component properties and
regress on them in order to match the density at standard conditions from either Standing
Katz or Costald (selected in the Density Method). The EOS will not predict the right densities
on its own at standard conditions so by matching it to correlations ensures a good start to the
matching process.
In the case of this example Costald will be selected, as this correlation is the default
used in process simulation tools.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 599
i) Experience has shown that the liquid densities predicted by Standing and Katz or
Costald methods are fairly close to the measured density under atmospheric
conditions, as these methods are based on the conservation of mass.
ii) During Auto Match, we iterate on the Heavy end parameters until the EOS
predicted density at surface is equal to the Standing and Katz density calculated
at surface.
iii) This usually provides a good starting point for calibrating the EOS models further.
The lab report 590 saturation pressure is 3548.3 psia. As the EOS is giving a lower saturation
pressure, it is possible to get closer to the saturation pressure by splitting the pseudo
component or adding BI coefficients. In the next steps this will be done by using the Whitson
Advanced Splitting Method 238 and the BI Coefficients entry screen.
The same indication can be obtained by running the Phase Envelope calculation.
Hit on Calc. On the phase envelope screen popping up, select the "Set Test Pts." button to
enter the saturation pressure.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 601
The Phase Envelope is used here only for qualitatively check the
saturation pressure with respect to the saturation pressure predicted
by the EOS. Note that the objective here is to match the only available
saturation pressure point and not the Phase envelope.
After that, depending on the flash to STD data available, run the Quick Calc for Flash to STD
or through Separator Stages.
In this case the data available concern separator experiment.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 603
Comparing these results with the lab report 590 , it is possible to see that the Oil Density at STD
are very close, whilst the GOR is around 12% off. This is not a a problem, as in the final
regression matching will be performed to tune the EOS to the lab data.
In fact, the objective of this first part of the EOS matching is to get an EOS close enough to
the real fluid in order to reduce the amount of regression necessary later. Therefore, even
larger differences in the GOR and density obtained can be acceptable at this stage.
In this example the Mw and SG of the pseudo will be modified respectively to 130 and 0.795
and after that Automatch perfomed:
This will get the separator experiment a bit closer to the experimental data:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 605
Once a satisfactory separator test is achieved, Store the pseudo component properties by
clicking on Store in the Pseudo Component screen.
Also, enable the option "Use Original Pseudo Props from Store 230 ". This will try and match
the liquid density at STD to the same Costald or Standing-Katz density determined on the
basis of the Stored pseudo component.
This can be achieved by using the Advanced Pseudo Splitting. In previous examples the
Whitson 238 splitting method was followed. In this exercise the Petroleum Experts 1
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 607
After that select Exit and Save and Automatch. This is the situation at the moment:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 609
Saturation Pressure:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 611
Select BI Coeffs, make use the Chevron Method is selected and then Calc Values:
After that, check with Quick Calc the Phase envelope to verify the match on the only
saturation pressure available:
As the EOS predicts a higher PSAT than the experimental data, then it is possible to gain a
good matching by reducing the maximum BI coefficient. This can be achieved by setting the
option Set Max Value to 0.01 and selecting Set Values:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 613
When accessing the Quick Calc screen, it is possible to see good agreement of the predicted
saturation pressure with the experimental data:
One can also verify that the separator train experiment is fine again.
If this was not satisfactory, the Pseudo needs to be Restored and the Splitting repeated.
At this point it is possible validate with Exit and Save and pass to the next stage of
matching.
The next step is to make sure that all the other important properties included in the lab report
are matched and to achieve that the EOS parameters Tc and Pc of the pseudo components,
BI coefficients and eventually volume shift will be regressed upon.
The next steps are:
A series of tab screens will be displayed, where the data concerning each experiment can be
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 615
entered.
With regards to the lab data to enter, refer to the lab report in the Data Available 590 section.
Enter the known data in the relevant sections as shown:
PSAT contains the information about the saturation pressure and density of the oil at
saturation. In this case the data concerning PSAT will come from the CCE report data.
To enter the CCE click on the CCE tab that appears on the screen shown above and this
takes to the next screen, where the data is entered. The data available are: liquid dropout
(definition 2 as per report 590 , corresponding to the % of liq drop out with respect to the total
volume), Z factor and relative volume:
Please ensure that the correct liquid dropout is entered in the match
data table.
In the Liquid Dropout input field the Liq dropout as % of total fluid (or
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 617
Similarly enter the separator experiment data under SEP tab in the lab data screen as shown
(only the GORs and oil density are entered):
Once the data is entered, select the data points that will be used in calibration. This can be
achieved by using the Include/Exclude and the Weighting features in the Match Data screen.
According to the Step by Step Guide, the minimum set of data required are:
Saturation Pressure
Z factor at saturation (CCE)
GOR from separator
Density of oil at Standard Conditions
Liquid dropout (CCE)
The idea is to start form a minimum set of data to start matching the EOS to, and then, if
The first step to take is to disable the relative volume in CCE measurements.
Select the column of relative volume and select Exclude.
The properties are then greyed-out, sign that they have been excluded.
Regarding the Gas Z factor, only one value is available, which will be kept.
As far as the Liquid Dropout is concerned, include only a few point, so that to reproduce the
profile of this property. For example, exclude alternate points, making sure to keep the
maximum (14.87%) and some points around it. Also, it is good practice to set weightings to
the points, higher for the maximum dropout and medium for the rest. This is in the attempt to
match at best the profile of liquid dropout:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 619
The same is done for the GOR measured at the second stage separator. Also for the GOR
from the first stage can be set to a lower weighting by selecting the cell containing the value
of the GOR, selecting the Weighting (3) and clicking on Set Weighting:
ii) A good model with predictive capabilities should use the minimum data to
calibrate and should predict other measured data reasonably well.
Once the properties that need to be matched against are selected, click OK to get out of lab
data entry screen.
3.3.2.4.4 Regression
The next step is to run a Regression by adjusting the pseudo components' Tc and Pc and BI
coefficient and Volume Shift .
Note that medium weighting can be set for each property, and that the Gas Oil ration is not
going to be added to the initial regression, as this property is in general affected by significant
measurement error. Also, one could verify that adding it to the regression would require
excessive corrections to the match parameters.
Then click on Regress. In the Matching screen select:
- the Tc and PC of the pseudo components only
- AF for the pseudo components only
- the BI coefficient All Pseudos by Same Multiplier
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 621
- and Volume Shift for all the components (except CO2 and N2):
Then Regress. During the Regression pay attention to the Best error: this should be as small
as possible.
If the error does not decrease after 20-30 iteration just Cancel the Regression and retry
following a different route starting from the definition of the Pseudo component.
When to stop depends on the case. In general the Best error should be as close to
zero as possible. In most cases it is possible to stop and then pass to the final
verification and check how the various properties have been matched.
In this example one can stop the regression after a few iterations and then verify the results.
Once the regression is done, there automatically appears the following screen showing the
tuned properties of all the components.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 623
This plot can be used to visualise how Tc and Pc of the pseudos have been changed (use the
Variables menu to enable the viewing of both Tc and Pc properties).
On this screen, click on Exit and Save. It takes back to the regression screen. On this screen
click on "Exit" and save and it takes back to the regression data selection screen.
Click "Main" to validate the results of the matching procedure.
To perform the validation, the Calculation menu will be used to simulate with the matched
EOS the same tests as in the lab.
The lab report data included in the Data Available 590 section will be used for the comparison.
Step 1. PSAT
Access the menu Calculation / Saturation Pressure, enter the temperature for which to
calculate the saturation pressure):
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 625
This is only for QC as the phase envelope as a whole has not been matched.
Step 3. CCE
Access the menu Calculation/Constant Composition Expansion, then enter the ranges of
temperature and pressure according to the lab report:
If oil FVF and GOR etc, need to be compared, the separator scheme
needs to be entered. If one leaves it blank all the GOR and FVF values
reported in the simulated experiment assume single stage atmospheric
flash. In the former case the option is selected from the Separator
calculator method drop down box
Click on Calc and Calc and then Plot from the results screen. Choose the variables from the
Variables menu and observe the various results computed using the matched Equation of
State .
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 627
The Z factor (vapour) is matching very well, as well as the Liquid Dropout:
The relative volume, not used in the matching will also be reproduced quite well.
Step 4. Separator
Running the separator experiment in the same conditions as the test data, it is possible to
observe a very good agreement with the lab data:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 629
(Note: to view the oil density and GOR results at the same time, the Layout button has been
used to change the layout of the table)
Note that if the EOS is not reproducing adequately any of the properties, one should review
on one side the whole matching process (by restarting from the Pseudo component definition
541 ) and on the other side verify the reliability of the data.
To achieve that, access the Calc Solids / Hydrate Formation Pressure menu and enter a
range of temperatures for which to determine the hydrate formation pressure:
At the bottom of this section one can also enter an inhibitor to assess the effect of inhibitor
injection in the wellbore. In this case no inhibitor is entered.
Select Calc and Calc and the program will calculate the hydrate formation envelope points:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 631
Hydrates are likely to form on the left hand side of the red curve.
For example, at pressure of 3000 psig, in order to prevent hydrates, the temperature should
be kept above 65 deg F (see figure above).
The next objective is to determine the quantity of inhibitor (for example, methanol) in order to
be able to produce a well against a wellhead pressure of 3000 psig, but for a wellhead
temperature of 60 deg C, as expected in the field.
To achieve the objective access the menu Calc Solids / Hydrate Min. Inhibitor Concentration,
enter the pressure and temperature conditions and Calc:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 633
The results at the bottom of the screen show that around 5% in mass of methanol has to be
injected to reduce the hydrate formation temperature at the given pressure of 3000 psig.
Note that the example uses a gas retrograde condensate fluid as subject, however,
exactly the same process can be applied to oil fluids.
3.3.3.1 Objectives
An EOS has been calibrated against a full lab report for a gas retrograde condensate fluid.
This EOS has been defined with 17 components, 10 pure components up to C6 and 7 pseudo
components.
It is requested to utilize this EOS in a reservoir numerical simulator, which is then connected
to a surface network model (GAP). Due to the high number of components, it is required to
generate an equivalent lumped composition with no more than 6 components. This Lumped
composition will be then used in the simulator, whilst the original Full composition will be used
in the network model.
Learning topics
To familiarise the user with the option of Lumping/Delumping in PVTP
To generate a pair Full/Lumped compositions
To export the two composition to GAP aa .PRP file
Executive Summary
This example will take the user through the following steps:
Generate the Lumped composition from the Full using the Lumping/Delumping feature
Use the Manual Lumping to create the Lumped composition
QC the Lumped and make eventual adjustments
Validate the pair Full/Lumped compositions by running different sensitivities and calculations
Export the two compositions together in a .PRP file
See also
Lumping/Delumping 302
3.3.3.2 Data Available
An EOS has been matched to lab report data and the final EOS is available.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 635
By running CCE calculation in the provided .pvi file, it is possible to verify that the EOS has
already been matched. For example, this is the CCE - liquid dropout:
In the same way the separator experiment is consistent to the data present in the Data/ Enter
Lab Data section.
3.3.3.3 Create and QC the Lumped composition
The steps to create a pair Full/Lumped compositions are the following:
1. Creating the Lumped from the Full composition
The starting point is an EOS that has been matched to a PVT lab report. This initial
EOS represents the "Full" composition as it has been matched using as large as
necessary a number of components. For example, if the EOS is to be used in a
process simulator, a large number of components can be chosen (for example 20 or
more).
The process of creation of a "Lumped" composition consists of defining the various
groups of components manually or recalling an existing grouping of an existing
Lumping Rule. In the first case (manual Lumping) a Lumping Rule is created, which
contains the logic followed to create the lumping. In the other two cases, the Lumping
rule comes from an already existing grouped composition or from an already existing
Lumping Rule.
When creating the Lumping Rule the program makes sure that the most
important PVT properties (saturation pressure, GOR and density at surface) in
the Full and Lumped compositions are consistent with each other.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 637
Access the More Setup to define the options that will be followed in creating the Lumped
composition:
When the options Match with GOR, PSAT and Hold Amount of Single Components are
enabled, the program will try and honour all of them at the same time.
However, it is important to note that in many cases it is not possible to physically
respect all of them at the same time.
For example, if a single component is to be held and at the same time the GOR of the
Lumped is to be matched to the Full composition GOR, the program will have to iterate
by setting the single component composition the same as the Full composition,
recombine the fluid to Target GOR to match the GOR, then re-set the single
component composition again same as the Full, recombe with Target GOR until the
GOR is honoured and the single component composition is kept the same. In many
cases it is not possible to achieve the matching of the GOR keeping the same mole
fraction.
That is why a hierarchy has been established in respecting the properties:
the Hold Amount is honoured first,
then the GOR second
then the PSAT third
This is because matching of the PSAT is relatively easy by manipulating opportunely
the EOS. Hold Amount is first in the
In any case, it is important to note that the user has full control about which options can
be selected, as well as any manual adjustments can be performed to achieve the most
suitable matching
A few options are available to create a Lumped composition, which can be found under
Lumping Method 302 .
The options that will be followed here is the Manual Lumping 307 , which is indeed the
recommended, as it allows the user to decide the best strategy to lump the components.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 639
Select Lump Stream. A screen similar to the Manual Grouping 257 is displayed:
Just like in the Grouping, select the components that will be part of each lump on the bottom-
right hand of the table, then Add Lump. Repeat that for all the lumps:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 641
As a rule of thumb, components with similar Molecular weight can be lumped together. In any
case, finding the best way of lumping is a trial and error process, based on having a final
Lumped EOS as close to the Full as possible.
Click on Lump. The program will ask to keep the Hold the amount of Pseudo Component.
Select Ok:
And the question of if to save the Lumping Rule is displayed. Validate with Yes.
The program will generate the Lumped composition and at the same time the Lumping Rule,
which describes how the Lump has been created:
The Lumping Rule Created can now be found in the Lumping Rules 312 section.
In the table on top of the screen it is possible to see that a Lumped composition has been
defined along with the Full.
On the left hand side it is possible to compare PSAT and GOR for the two Full and Lumped
compositions. The GOR is matched very well, as well as the PSAT of the Lumped
composition which is consistent with the PSAT of the Full composition.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 643
Saturation Pressure:
Phase Envelope (here only for qualitative purpose, as only one saturation point is to be
matched and not all the envelope):
Separator experiment:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 645
Should a difference in, for instance, saturation pressure be observed between the full and the
lumped composition, the following adjustment procedure can be used as general guide to be
followed in cases where an adjustment is required to achieve a better matching.
The idea at the basis of the adjustment is to modify the existing Rule in order to better match
the PSAT.
Step1.
It is possible to modify the rule by accessing the Lumping Rules button highlighted above:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 647
This section (refer to the user Guide related topic 312 ) allows to create new rules, edit existing
ones, deleting them.
Step2.
Access the Select button. This will lead to the details of the Lumping Rule:
The PSAT is matched by means of a BI coefficient multiplier (ref. user Guide 312 ). It is now
possible to adjust this parameter to match the PSAT.
The Lumped composition was giving a PSAT 40 psig lower than the the Full composition.
Increasing the BI coefficient multiplier should increase the Lumped composition PSAT. For
example, set the BI multiplier to 1.3, the Ok and Ok back to the Lumping/Delumping section.
Step 3.
There select Clear Lumping:
and then Lump Stream again. The program is set to Lump from Stream, therefore the just
modified Lumping Rule will be used to Lump the Full composition:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 649
Go back to Step 2 modifying the BI coefficient multiplier and repeat Step 3 clearing and
lumping the stream again.
Validating again with Quick Calc, as seen above, it is possible to verify that the PSAT,
GOR and Oil density at STD from separator all match very well.
For example, access the CCE calculation and enter a range of temperatures and pressures
for example:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 651
When a stream (the "Full" composition) has a correspondent Lumped composition, in any
calculation screen it is possible to select if to run the calculation for the Full, the Lumped or for
both compositions (refer related topic 394 ).
Run the calculation for both compositions.
In the Plot select variables like Liquid Dropout, Gas Z factor, Oil FVF, etc:
It is possible to verify that there is a pretty good agreement between the two compositions.
This concludes the QC of the pair Full/Lumped compositions.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 653
If the check was not satisfactory, then a different lumping strategy (different arrangement of
the components in the lumps, number of lumps, etc.) should be followed.
Thermal properties (like enthalpies, specific heat capacities, etc.) are accurately calculated
only when a detailed composition is provided.
The difference illustrated above shows that a big error would be made if a Lumped
composition is used for the thermal properties calculations.
This the main reason why models where the thermal properties are important - process
models in general and surface network models whenever the temperature estimation is
critical - require extended compositions.
This is why in GAP in the EOS options there is an option to estimate the thermal properties
using the Full composition.
The program will ask if to export the Lumping Rule along with the compositions. Select Yes:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 655
3.3.4.1 Objectives
A downhole fluid sample is taken in a well and a full lab report has been carried out on the
fluid.
On comparison with the fingerprint of the drilling mud, it has been verified that the sample is
contaminated.
The objective is to build a reliable EOS model of the un-contaminated fluid.
Learning topics
To familiarise the user with the decontamination procedure that can be used in PVTP
Executive Summary
This example will take the user through the following steps:
How to make the C7+ distribution in PVTP follow the carbon number versus mole % profile
measured in laboratory
Step by step approach to estimate the uncontaminated sample properties from a
calibrated EOS model of a contaminated oil sample.
Composition:
Componen Mole
t Percent
N2 0.05
CO2 0.15
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 657
C1 37.6
C2 9.7
C3 9.8
C4 6.6
C5 4.3
C6 3.5
C7+ 28.3
C7+ Properties
Mw: 275 g/mol
S.G.: 0.871
Reservoir Data:
A multi stage separator experiment performed on the reservoir fluid resulted in the following
results:
The results of the constant mass study at done of the sample at 199.4 degF are:
Extended Composition analysis of the C7+ fraction contaminated Reservoir Fluid sample
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 659
21
C 0.2062 C40 0.0647 C58+ 0.0203
22
C 0.1933 C41 0.0607
23
C 0.1813 C42 0.0569
24
On this screen, click on the Advanced option where it is possible to define a mole % profile
for C7+ using the default method.
Select Follow Profile and Automatically Follow Split Profile:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 661
To enter the profile measured in the laboratory, click on Set up Split Profile button and the
following dialog comes up. Fill the measured mole% data against carbon number in the
screen.
Once the profile has been set-up, click on Exit and Save to go back to the Advanced Pseudo
Split screen. On this screen press Recalculate Split as shown below.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 663
Once this is done click on Exit and save button on all the screens that appears until the main
PVTP screen.
This screen lists all the components along with their mole %, molecular weights etc. The C7+
components are listed in red.
The next step is to remove / re-estimate the excess mole % of heavy end hydrocarbon that
comes from the contaminant.
For this example the contaminant mole % will estimated from the heavy end profile. Click on
Plot, this shows the plot of the C7+ distribution as per entered contaminated profile.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 665
The initial peak that is seen in the profile is because of C1, which is as expected. To see the
profile after C7 one can access the Display / Scales menu in the Plot area and set the scales
to best accommodate the plot:
Now after C7 the profile naturally is expected to be smooth as seen in example 1. The peaks
that cab be observed in the profile from C14 to C18 are due the contamination from the oil
based mud. From this plot assuming a uniformly decreasing smooth curve the mole % of the
C14-C18 can be estimated. The estimated mole percent are
Once the new mole percent are estimated, these are entered in the decontamination screen
as shown below
Once new compositions are entered, press on Quick Look. This takes to the next screen
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 667
where the program creates a temporary decontaminated stream and its properties can be
quickly evaluated:
On this screen press again Quick Calc. It takes us to the next screen as shown:
At this stage PVTP has created a temporary decontaminated stream called Decon_Temp and
one can perform the listed calculations with it. Begin by selecting Phase envelope and
pressing Calc. This takes to the following screen. On this screen, on the left hand side all the
fluid streams are listed. Select both the contaminated and decontaminated one and hit Calc.
This picture shows how the phase envelopes compare. Because of decontamination the
saturation pressure goes up in this case. Click on Exit | cancel | Exit and it takes to the screen
in the figure below. On this screen click on Decontaminate, which take us to the following
screen.
On this screen two options are available. Select to Create a new stream.
After this press Decontaminate and the program calculates the decontaminated fluid model
and displays the EOS parameters of the same as shown below:
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual
Examples Guide 669
Enter Exit and Save on this and subsequent screens to go to the main PVTP screen.
The newly created stream corresponds to the decontaminated fluid and can be used for
calculations.
February, 2011
PVTP Help And Manual